aspen adsim

307
Aspen Adsim 2004.1 Adsorption Reference Guide

Upload: kiny81

Post on 05-Mar-2015

3.521 views

Category:

Documents


13 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Aspen Adsim

Aspen Adsim 2004.1

Adsorption Reference Guide

Page 2: Aspen Adsim

Who Should Read this Guide 2

Who Should Read this Guide

This guide contains reference information for use by experienced users of the Aspen Adsim application.

The guide also describes the following Aspen Adsim features:

• Numerical methods for solving the partial differential equations.

• Estimation module.

• Cyclic Organizer.

• Flowsheeting strategies.

Page 3: Aspen Adsim

General Information 3

General Information

This section provides Copyright details and lists any other documentation related to the Aspen Adsim 2004.1 release.

Copyright Version: 2004.1

April 2005

Copyright © 1991-2005 Aspen Technology, Inc, and its applicable subsidiaries, affiliates, and suppliers. All rights reserved. This Software is a proprietary product of Aspen Technology, Inc., its applicable subsidiaries, affiliates and suppliers and may be used only under agreement with AspenTech.

Aspen ACOL, Aspen Adsim®, Aspen Advisor, Aspen Aerotran®, Aspen Alarm & Event, Aspen APLE, Aspen Apollo Desktop, Aspen Apollo Online, Aspen AssetBuilder, Aspen ATOMS, Aspen Automated Stock Replenishment, Aspen Batch Plus®, Aspen Batch.21, Aspen BatchCAD, Aspen BatchSep, Aspen Calc, Aspen Capable-to-Promise®, Aspen CatRef®, Aspen Chromatography®, Aspen Cim-IO for ACS, Aspen Cim-IO for Csi VXL, Aspen Cim-IO for Dow MIF, Aspen Cim-IO for G2, Aspen Cim-IO for GSE D/3, Aspen Cim-IO for Hewlett-Packard RTAP, Aspen Cim-IO for Hitachi PLC (H04E), Aspen Cim-IO for Intellution Fix, Aspen Cim-IO for Melsec, Aspen Cim-IO for WonderWare InTouch, Aspen Cim-IO for Yokogawa Centum CS, Aspen Cim-IO for Yokogawa Centum XL, Aspen Cim-IO for Yokogawa EW3, Aspen Cim-IO Interfaces, Aspen Cim-IO Monitor, Aspen Cim-IO, Aspen Collaborative Demand Management, Aspen Collaborative Forecasting, Aspen Compliance.21, Aspen COMThermo TRC Database, Aspen COMThermo®, Aspen Cost Factor Manual, Aspen Crude Manager, Aspen Crude Margin Evaluation, Aspen Custom Modeler®, Aspen Data Source Architecture, Aspen Decision Analyzer, Aspen Demand Manager, Aspen DISTIL, Aspen Distribution Scheduler, Aspen DMCplus® Composite, Aspen DMCplus® Desktop, Aspen DMCplus® Online, Aspen DPO, Aspen Dynamics®, Aspen eBRS, Aspen Enterprise Model, Aspen ERP Connect, Aspen FCC®, Aspen FIHR, Aspen FLARENET, Aspen Fleet Operations Management, Aspen Framework, Aspen FRAN, Aspen Fuel Gas Optimizer Desktop, Aspen Fuel Gas Optimizer Online, Aspen General Construction Standards, Aspen Hetran®, Aspen HX-Net®, Aspen Hydrocracker®, Aspen Hydrotreater, Aspen HYSYS Amines, Aspen HYSYS Crude, Aspen HYSYS Dynamics, Aspen HYSYS

Page 4: Aspen Adsim

General Information 4

OLGAS 3-Phase, Aspen HYSYS OLGAS, Aspen HYSYS OLI Interface, Aspen HYSYS Tacite, Aspen HYSYS Upstream Dynamics, Aspen HYSYS Upstream, Aspen HYSYS®, Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator®, Aspen Icarus Project Manager®, Aspen InfoPlus.21®, Aspen Inventory Balancing, Aspen IQ Desktop, Aspen IQ Online, Aspen IQmodel Powertools, Aspen Kbase®, Aspen LIMS Interface, Aspen Local Security, Aspen LPIMS, Aspen MBO, Aspen MIMI®, Aspen MPIMS, Aspen Multivariate Server, Aspen MUSE, Aspen NPIMS, Aspen OnLine®, Aspen Operations Manager - Event Management, Aspen Operations Manager - Integration Infrastructure, Aspen Operations Manager - Peformance Scorecarding, Aspen Operations Manager - Role Based Visualization, Aspen Order Credit Management, Aspen Orion Planning, Aspen Orion, Aspen PEP Process Library, Aspen PIMS Blend Model Library, Aspen PIMS Distributed Processing, Aspen PIMS Enterprise Edition, Aspen PIMS Mixed Integer Programming, Aspen PIMS Simulator Interface, Aspen PIMS Solution Ranging, Aspen PIMS Submodel Calculator, Aspen PIMS XNLP Optimizer, Aspen PIMS, Aspen PIPESYS, Aspen PIPE, Aspen Planning Accuracy, Aspen Plant Planner & Scheduler, Aspen Plant Scheduler Lite, Aspen Plant Scheduler, Aspen Plus OLI Interface, Aspen Plus®, Aspen Polymers Plus®, Aspen PPIMS, Aspen Process Data, Aspen Process Explorer, Aspen Process Manual, Aspen Process Order, Aspen Process Plant Construction Standards, Aspen Process Recipe®, Aspen Process Tools, Aspen Product Margin & Blending Evaluation, Aspen Production Control Web Server, Aspen ProFES® 2P Tran, Aspen ProFES® 2P Wax, Aspen ProFES® 3P Tran, Aspen ProFES® Tranflo, Aspen Properties®, Aspen Pumper Log, Aspen Q Server, Aspen RateSep, Aspen RefSYS CatCracker, Aspen RefSYS Spiral, Aspen RefSYS, Aspen Report Writer, Aspen Resource Scheduling Optimization, Aspen RTO Watch Cim-IO Server, Aspen RTO Watch Server, Aspen Scheduling & Inventory Management, Aspen SmartStep Desktop, Aspen SmartStep Online, Aspen SQLplus, Aspen Supply Chain Analytics, Aspen Supply Chain Connect, Aspen Supply Planner, Aspen Tank Management, Aspen TASC-Mechanical, Aspen TASC, Aspen Teams®, Aspen Terminals Management, Aspen TICP, Aspen Transition Manager, Aspen Turbo PIMS, Aspen Utilities, Aspen Voice Fulfillment Management, Aspen Watch Desktop, Aspen Watch Server, Aspen Water, Aspen Web Fulfillment Management, Aspen WinRace Database, Aspen XPIMS, Aspen Zyqad Development Version, Aspen Zyqad, SLM, SLM Commute, SLM Config Wizard, the aspen leaf logo, and Plantelligence are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Cambridge, MA.

All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license.

Corporate

Aspen Technology, Inc. Phone: (1) (617) 949-1000

Ten Canal Park Toll Free: (1) (888) 996-7001

Page 5: Aspen Adsim

General Information 5

Cambridge, MA 02141-2201 Fax: (1) (617) 949-1030

USA URL: http://www.aspentech.com

Page 6: Aspen Adsim

General Information 6

Related Documentation In addition to this document, the following documents are provided to help users learn and use the Aspen Adsim applications.

Title Content

Aspen Adsim 2004.1 Library Reference Guide Describes the models, streams, procedures and submodels available in Aspen Adsim.

AES 2004.1 Installation Guide Full installation procedures for both server and client.

Aspen Engineering Suite 2004.1 Whats New Guide

An overview of new features and functionality within this release.

Page 7: Aspen Adsim

Technical Support 7

Technical Support

Online Technical Support Center AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance agreement can register to access the Online Technical Support Center at:

http://support.aspentech.com

You use the Online Technical Support Center to:

• Access current product documentation.

• Search for technical tips, solutions, and frequently asked questions (FAQs).

• Search for and download application examples.

• Search for and download service packs and product updates.

• Submit and track technical issues.

• Search for and review known limitations.

• Send suggestions.

Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-Bulletins. These e-Bulletins proactively alert you to important technical support information such as:

• Technical advisories.

• Product updates.

• Service Pack announcements.

• Product release announcements.

Page 8: Aspen Adsim

Technical Support 8

Phone and E-mail Customer support is also available by phone, fax, and e-mail for customers who have a current support contract for their product(s). Toll-free charges are listed where available; otherwise local and international rates apply.

For the most up-to-date phone listings; please see the Online Technical Support Center at:

http://support.aspentech.com Support Centers Operating Hours

North America 8:00 20:00 Eastern time

South America 9:00 17:00 Local time

Europe 8:30 18:00 Central European time

Asia and Pacific Region 9:00 17:30 Local time

Page 9: Aspen Adsim

Contents 9

Contents

GENERAL INFORMATION................................................................................. 3 Copyright................................................................................................................ 3 Related Documentation............................................................................................. 6

TECHNICAL SUPPORT...................................................................................... 7 Online Technical Support Center ................................................................................ 7 Phone and E-mail..................................................................................................... 8

INTRODUCING ASPEN ADSIM ....................................................................... 17

1 GAS ADSORPTION PROCESSES.................................................................. 18 About Gas Adsorption Processes............................................................................... 18 Bed Model Assumptions for Gas Adsorption Processes ................................................. 19 About Aspen Adsim's Bed Models ............................................................................. 20

Bed Model Ports................................................................................................ 20 Configure Form (Gas) ............................................................................................. 21

Configure Form (gas): Bed Type.......................................................................... 22 Configure Form (gas): Spatial Dimensions ............................................................ 24 Configure Form (gas): Internal Heat Exchanger..................................................... 25

Configure Layer Form (gas) ..................................................................................... 26 General Tab (gas) .................................................................................................. 26

General Tab (gas): Discretization Method to be used.............................................. 26 General Tab (gas): Number of Nodes ................................................................... 27 General Tab (gas): Number of Radial Nodes.......................................................... 27 General Tab (gas): Flux Limiter to be used ........................................................... 27 General Tab (gas): Gas Model Assumption............................................................ 27

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (gas) ..................................................................... 28 About Axial Dispersion in Gas Adsorption Processes ............................................... 28 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (gas): Material Balance Assumption....................... 29 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (gas): Momentum Balance Assumption .................. 31 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (gas): 2-D Dispersive Properties ........................... 33

Kinetic Model Tab (gas) .......................................................................................... 37 Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Film Model Assumption.................................................... 37 Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Kinetic Model Assumption ................................................ 37

Page 10: Aspen Adsim

Contents 10

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Form of Lumped Resistance Model .................................... 50 Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Molecular Diffusivities ..................................................... 51 Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients.................................... 52 Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Apply Cyclic Correction.................................................... 55 Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Estimated Mass Transfer Coefficient Assumption ................. 56 Gas Adsorption Layer (gas): Particle Material Balance, Number of Nodes................... 56 Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Particle Material Balance, Effective Diffusivity ..................... 56

Isotherm Tab (gas) ................................................................................................ 57 About Adsorption Isotherms for Gas Adsorption Processes ...................................... 57 Guidelines for Choosing Aspen Adsim Isotherm Models (gas)................................... 58 About Multi-Component Mixture Isotherms (gas) ................................................... 58 Isotherm Tab (gas): Isotherm Assumed for Layer .................................................. 61 Isotherm Tab (gas): Adsorbed Solution Theory...................................................... 70 Isotherm Tab (gas): Isotherm Dependency........................................................... 70

Energy Balance Tab (gas)........................................................................................ 70 Energy Balance Tab (gas): Energy Balance Assumption .......................................... 70 Energy Balance Tab (gas): Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase................................... 71 Energy Balance Tab (gas): Heat of Adsorption Assumption...................................... 72 Energy Balance Tab (gas): Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient................................... 73 Energy Balance Tab (gas): Form of Gas Thermal Conductivity ................................. 75 Energy Balance Tab (gas): Heat Transfer to Environment........................................ 76 Energy Balance Tab (gas): Form of Gas-Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient ..................... 78

Reaction Tab (gas) ................................................................................................. 79 About Gas Adsorption with Reaction Processes ...................................................... 79 Reaction Tab (gas): Reactions Present ................................................................. 80 Reaction Tab (gas): Homogeneous Rate Dependency ............................................. 80 Reaction Tab (gas): Number of Homogeneous Reactions......................................... 81 Reaction Tab (gas): Heterogeneous Rate Dependency ............................................ 81 Reaction Tab (gas): Number of Heterogeneous Reactions ....................................... 81 Reaction Tab (gas): Are Solid Reactants Present.................................................... 82 Reaction Tab (gas): Solid Reactant List ................................................................ 82

Procedures Tab (gas).............................................................................................. 82 Gas Adsorption: Summary of Mass and Energy Balance Equations................................. 82

Gas Adsorption: Mass Balance for Gas Phase......................................................... 83 Gas Adsorption: Mass Balance for Additional Solid Phase ........................................ 83 Gas Adsorption: Gas Phase Energy Balance........................................................... 84 Gas Adsorption: Solid Phase Energy Balance ......................................................... 84 Gas Adsorption: Wall Energy Balance ................................................................... 85 Gas Adsorption: Summary of Factors that affect the Mass Balance Equations............. 85 Gas Adsorption: Defining the Mass Balance for Additional Solid Phases ..................... 87 Gas Adsorption: Summary of Factors that affect the Energy Balance ........................ 87

Page 11: Aspen Adsim

Contents 11

Gas Adsorption: Defining the Energy Balance in the Gas Phase ................................ 87 Gas Adsorption: Defining the Energy Balance for the Solid Phase ............................. 90 Gas Adsorption: Defining Energy Balance for the Wall ............................................ 92

Gas Adsorption: Explanation of Equation Symbols....................................................... 93

2 GAS CYCLIC STEADY STATE MODELING..................................................... 99 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 99 What is CSS Modeling? ........................................................................................100 Discretization Techniques for Time and Space ...........................................................103 Connectivity between CSS Models ...........................................................................103 Bed Model Details .................................................................................................104

Material Balance ..............................................................................................104 Momentum Balance ..........................................................................................105 Kinetic Model...................................................................................................106 Energy Balance................................................................................................109

Adsorption Equilibrium Models ................................................................................112 Introduction ....................................................................................................112 Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 1...........................................113 Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 2...........................................113 Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 3...........................................114 Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 4...........................................115 Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 5...........................................116 Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 1...................................117 Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 2...................................118 Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 3...................................119 Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 4...................................120 Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 5...................................121 Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Dual-Site Langmuir 1 .............................122 Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Dual-Site Langmuir 2 .............................123 I.A.S.T. (Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory)............................................................123 Pure Isotherm List for the IAST Calculation of CSS................................................125 Langmuir 1 .....................................................................................................126 Langmuir 2 .....................................................................................................126 Langmuir 3 .....................................................................................................127 Langmuir 4 .....................................................................................................128 Langmuir 5 .....................................................................................................129 Dual-Site Langmuir 1........................................................................................130 Dual-Site Langmuir 2........................................................................................130 Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 1.............................................................................131 Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 2.............................................................................132 Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 3.............................................................................133

Page 12: Aspen Adsim

Contents 12

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 4.............................................................................134 Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 5.............................................................................135 Henry 1 ..........................................................................................................136 Henry 2 ..........................................................................................................136 Henry 3 ..........................................................................................................137 Henry 4 ..........................................................................................................137 Freundlich 1 ....................................................................................................138 Toth 1 ............................................................................................................139 BET 1 .............................................................................................................139

User Guidelines.....................................................................................................140 How to Create a CSS Simulation Flowsheet ..........................................................140 How to Create a Dynamic Simulation Flowsheet using CSS Models ..........................158 How to Convert a CSS Flowsheet to a Dynamic Flowsheet ......................................174 How to Convert a Dynamic Flowsheet into a CSS Flowsheet ...................................177 Developers Tips to Get Better Convergence Property in CSS Simulation...................180

3 ION-EXCHANGE PROCESSES.....................................................................184 About Ion-Exchange Processes...........................................................................184 Bed Model Assumptions for Ion-Exchange............................................................185 Configure Form (ionx).......................................................................................185 Configure Layer Form (ionx) ..............................................................................185 General Tab (ionx) ...........................................................................................186 General Tab (ionx): Discretization Method to be Used............................................186 General Tab (ionx): Number of Nodes .................................................................186 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (ionx)...............................................................186 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (ionx): Material Balance Assumption.....................186 About Axial Dispersion in Ion-Exchange Processes ................................................188 Deciding When to Use Axial Dispersion in Ion-Exchange Processes ..........................188 Kinetic Model Tab (ionx)....................................................................................189 Kinetic Model Tab (ionx): Film Model Assumption..................................................189 Kinetic Model Tab (ionx): Kinetic Model Assumption ..............................................190 Kinetic Model Tab (ionx): Form of Lumped Resistance ...........................................190 Kinetic Model Tab (ionx): Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient ...................................191 Isotherm Tab (ionx) .........................................................................................191 About Adsorption Isotherms for Ion-Exchange Processes .......................................191 Isotherm Tab (ionx): Isotherm Assumed for Layer ................................................192 Summary of Mass Balance Equations for Ion-Exchange Processes ...........................194 Explanation of Equation Symbols for Ion-Exchange Processes.................................195

4 LIQUID ADSORPTION PROCESSES ...........................................................197 About Liquid Adsorption Processes......................................................................197 Bed Model Assumptions for Liquid Adsorption.......................................................198

Page 13: Aspen Adsim

Contents 13

Configure Form (liq) .........................................................................................198 Configure Layer Form (liq).................................................................................198 General Tab (liq)..............................................................................................199 General Tab (liq): Discretization Method to be Used ..............................................199 General Tab (liq): Number of Nodes....................................................................199 Material/Momentum Balance (liq) .......................................................................199 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (liq): Material Balance Assumption .......................199 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (liq): Pressure Drop Assumption...........................201 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (liq): Velocity Assumption ...................................202 Material/Momentum Balance Tab (liq): Overall Material Balance Assumption.............202 Kinetic Model Tab (liq) ......................................................................................202 Kinetic Model Tab (liq): Film Model Assumption ....................................................203 Kinetic Model Tab (liq): Kinetic Model Assumption.................................................203 Kinetic Model Tab (liq): Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient......................................204 About Adsorption Isotherms for Liquid Adsorption.................................................205 Guidelines for Choosing Aspen Adsim Isotherm Models ..........................................205 The Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory (IAS) ...........................................................206 Isotherm Tab (liq): Isotherm Assumed for Layer...................................................206 Energy Balance Tab (liq) ...................................................................................212 Energy Balance Tab (liq): Energy Balance Assumption...........................................212 Energy Balance Tab (liq): Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase ...................................214 Energy Balance Tab (liq): Heat of Adsorption Assumption ......................................214 Energy Balance Tab (liq): Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient ...................................215 Energy Balance Tab (liq): Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity.................................216 Energy Balance Tab (liq): Heat Transfer to Environment ........................................217 Procedures Tab (liq) .........................................................................................219 Liquid Adsorption: Summary of Mass and Energy Balance ......................................219 Liquid Adsorption: Mass Balance.........................................................................219 Liquid Adsorption: Solid Phase Energy Balance .....................................................220 Liquid Adsorption: Fluid Phase Energy Balance .....................................................220 Liquid Adsorption: Wall Energy Balance ...............................................................220 Liquid Adsorption: Explanation of Equation Symbols..............................................221

5 NUMERICAL METHODS .............................................................................224 About Numerical Methods..................................................................................224 Choosing the Discretization Method ....................................................................225 About the Discretization Methods........................................................................225 Upwind Differencing Scheme 1...........................................................................227 Upwind Differencing Scheme 2...........................................................................228 Central Differencing Scheme 1 ...........................................................................228 Central Differencing Scheme 2 ...........................................................................229 Leonard Differencing Scheme.............................................................................229

Page 14: Aspen Adsim

Contents 14

Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme ...............................................................230 Mixed Differencing Scheme................................................................................232 Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme....................................................................233 Fromms scheme..............................................................................................234 Flux Limited Discretization Scheme.....................................................................235

6 ESTIMATION WITH ASPEN ADSIM............................................................236 Two Estimation Tools in Aspen Adsim 2004.1 .......................................................236 About the Estimation Module .............................................................................236 Defining Estimated Variables in the Estimation Module ..........................................238 Steady-State Estimation Using the Estimation Module ...........................................239 Manually Entering Steady-State Experimental Data...............................................239 Steady-State Experimental Data from the Clipboard..............................................240 Dynamic Estimation Using the Estimation Module .................................................242 Manually Entering Dynamic Experimental Data .....................................................243 Dynamic Experimental Data from the Clipboard....................................................244 Performing Estimation Using the Estimation Module ..............................................247 Converting Estimation Module Data ....................................................................247 Recommendations When Using the Estimation Module...........................................247

7 CYCLIC OPERATION .................................................................................249 Cyclic Operations in Aspen Adsim 2004.1.............................................................249 About the Cycle Organizer .................................................................................249 Opening the Cycle Organizer..............................................................................250 Cycle Organizer Window....................................................................................250 Step Control....................................................................................................252 Time Driven Step .............................................................................................252 Discrete Event Driven Step................................................................................252 Step Variables .................................................................................................256 Adding Step Variables.......................................................................................256 Removing Step Variables...................................................................................257 Changing Step Variable Values...........................................................................257 Interaction Control ...........................................................................................258 Defining a Step Interaction................................................................................258 Deleting Interaction Steps .................................................................................259 Adding Extra Interaction Steps...........................................................................259 Interacting Steps and Time Controls ...................................................................259 Additional Cycle Controls...................................................................................260 Maximum Cycles Box........................................................................................260 Record Initial and Record Frequency Boxes ..........................................................261 Take Snapshot Box...........................................................................................261 Cyclic Steady State Testing Box .........................................................................261

Page 15: Aspen Adsim

Contents 15

Additional Step Controls....................................................................................262 Execute End of Step Script Box ..........................................................................262 Take Snapshot at End of Step Box ......................................................................262 Generating Cyclic Tasks ....................................................................................263 Activating and Deactivating Cyclic Tasks..............................................................263 Cyclic Reports..................................................................................................264 Preparing Aspen Adsim for Cyclic Reporting .........................................................264 Cyclic Stream Reports.......................................................................................265 Cyclic Recovery Reports ....................................................................................266

8 FLOWSHEETING .......................................................................................268 About Model Types ...........................................................................................268 General Model Types ........................................................................................269 Reversibility ....................................................................................................269 About Flowsheets in Aspen Adsim.......................................................................272 Connectivity on Flowsheets................................................................................273 Templates.......................................................................................................274 Demonstrations ...............................................................................................274 Types of Flowsheet in Aspen Adsim.....................................................................275 Types of Flowsheet: Simple Flowsheet ................................................................275 Intermediate Flowsheet.....................................................................................276 Full Flowsheet..................................................................................................277 Single Bed Approach.........................................................................................278 Pressure Interaction Diagram.............................................................................278 Interactions.....................................................................................................281 Specifications for Flowsheets .............................................................................283 Solver Options.................................................................................................283 Run Time Options.............................................................................................285 Model Specification...........................................................................................286 Consistency and Problem Definition Checks..........................................................287 Physical Properties ...........................................................................................288 Use of User Fortran ..........................................................................................289 Using a Physical Properties Application ................................................................290 Switching Between Methods...............................................................................290 Connecting to Aspen Dynamics Flowsheets ..........................................................291 Typical Workflows ............................................................................................291 Valid Flowsheet Combinations ............................................................................293 Connecting to a Single Bed Approach Flowsheet ...................................................296

9 REFERENCE LIST FOR ADSORPTION PROCESSES......................................298

INDEX ..........................................................................................................299

Page 16: Aspen Adsim

Contents 16

Page 17: Aspen Adsim

Introducing Aspen Adsim 17

Introducing Aspen Adsim

Aspen Adsim simulates gas processes with adsorption only, or adsorptive reaction gas processes where both reaction and adsorption occur simultaneously.

Gas-phase adsorption is widely used for the large-scale purification or bulk separation of air, natural gas, chemicals and petrochemicals.

Page 18: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 18

1 Gas Adsorption Processes

This chapter contains information on:

• About Gas Adsorption Processes.

• Bed Model Assumptions for Gas Adsorption Processes.

• About Aspen Adsim Bed Models.

• Configure Form.

• Configure Layer Form.

• General Tab.

• Material/Momentum Balance Tab.

• Kinetic Model Tab.

• Isotherm Tab.

• Energy Balance Tab.

• Reaction Tab.

• Procedure Tab.

• Summary of Mass and Energy Balance Equations.

• Explanation of Equation Symbols.

About Gas Adsorption Processes Gas-phase adsorption is widely used for the large-scale purification or bulk separation of air, natural gas, chemicals and petrochemicals, where it is often better to use gas-phase adsorption rather than the older unit operations of distillation and absorption.

Adsorbent attracts molecules from the gas, removing the molecules from the gas phase and concentrate on the surface of the adsorbent. Many process concepts have been developed to allow:

• Efficient contact of feed gas mixtures with adsorbent to carry out desired separations.

• Efficient regeneration of the adsorbent for subsequent reuse.

Page 19: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 19

For gas phase applications, most commercial adsorbents are pellets, beads, or other granular shapes, typically about 1.5 to 3.2 mm in diameter. These adsorbents are usually packed into fixed beds through which the gaseous feed mixtures are passed. Normally, the process is cyclic. When the bed capacity is exhausted, the feed flow is stopped to finish the loading step of the process. The bed is then treated to remove the adsorbed molecules in separate regeneration steps, then the cycle is repeated.

Gas phase adsorption processes have seen a growth in both variety and scale, especially since 1970. This is due mainly to improvements in adsorbents, for example the discovery of porous adsorbents with a large surface area, such as zeolites. These advances have encouraged parallel inventions of new process concepts. Increasingly, the development of new applications requires close cooperation in adsorbent design and process cycle development and optimization.

Bed Model Assumptions for Gas Adsorption Processes Aspen Adsim simulates gas processes with adsorption only, or adsorptive reaction gas processes where both reaction and adsorption occur simultaneously.

For gas processes, the bed model makes the following assumptions:

• Isothermal or non-isothermal conditions apply. Terms in the energy balances include: − Thermal conductivity of gas and thermal conductivity of solid. − Compression. − Gas-solid heat transfer. − Heat of adsorption. − Enthalpy of adsorbed phase. − Heat exchange with environment. − Wall energy terms. − Enthalpy of mixing is negligible.

• Plug flow or plug flow with axial dispersion occurs.

• The system is fully mixed in the radial direction. Alternatively, radial dispersion and thermal conduction are used to account for radial material and temperature distributions.

• The gas phase is ideal or non-ideal, the non-ideal behavior needing a compressibility factor.

• Gas phase pressure is either constant (with velocity either constant, or varying according to mass balance and only applicable for breakthrough simulations), or the pressure varies according to a laminar or turbulent flow momentum balance.

Page 20: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 20

• Mass transfer is described using a lumped overall resistance, or by a model that accounts separately for micropore and macropore effects. The driving force is based on a liquid or solid film, and is either linear, quadratic, or user-specified. Mass transfer coefficients are either constant, or vary with local conditions. A limited rigorous particle material balance functionality is provided.

• Adsorption isotherms are either applicable for single or multi-component adsorption. IAS theory can be used for pure component isotherms.

About Aspen Adsim's Bed Models The table shows the classifications of adsorption bed models:

Name Type

Model type Flow setter under compressible flow conditions.

Flow type Reversible.

Time dependency Dynamic.

Reversible models handle forward or reverse flow in the bed. They contain dummy variables associated with the input and output streams.

The adsorption bed models are usually flow setters, but within the bed they can be both flow setters and pressure setters. This is because they determine internal pressure profiles and gas velocity profiles, provided the general compressible flow model is used.

The nature of the process and its operating conditions determine the type of model to use. For example, a bulk separation process such as producing oxygen-rich gas from air requires a different model to that for a purification process for removing trace impurities.

The adsorption column models use a set of partial differential equations to represent the momentum, heat, and material balances across the column. You can add further relationships, which are specific to the various options.

Bed Model Ports Bed models contain an input and an output port. Each port has associated variables that correspond to the material connection stream variables, and which allow for reversible flow.

Page 21: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 21

Configure Form (Gas) On the Configure form of the bed model:

1 Enter the number of layers within the bed (one or more).

2 Enter the bed type: Vertical, Horizontal or Radial. See Configure Form for Gas Process Bed Model, later.

3 For vertical beds only, define the spatial dimensions of the bed model: 1-D or 2-D. See Configure Form for Gas Process Bed Model: Spatial Dimensions, later.

4 For vertical and horizontal beds, specify whether an internal heat exchanger is present. See Configure Form for Gas Process Bed Model: Internal Heat, and See Configure Form for Gas Process Bed Model: Spatial Dimensions, later.

5 In the Description box for each layer, type a brief name or description.

6 Click Configure to open the

Page 22: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 22

Configure Layer Form (gas) dialog box.

7 Click Specify to open the Specify form for the layer model.

Configure Form (gas): Bed Type To choose the bed type:

• In the Bed Type box, choose vertical, horizontal or radial bed orientation.

Vertical Bed Type

Typically, you use a vertical orientation for an adsorption bed. Vertical columns prevent variation in flow width because the flow is along the column axis.

Horizontal Bed Type

Occasionally, you may need to choose horizontal orientation, for example, when a vertical bed may cause fluidization of the bed. Horizontal beds allow a much greater inflow area, keeping gas superficial velocities below the fluidization velocity.

In the horizontal column orientation, the flow through the adsorbent packing is still vertical, but is now at right angles to the column axis so there is variation in the effective flow area of the column with height above the column base. The height of the start of the (first) adsorbent layer above the column base is the same thickness as the empty dead space and supporting grating.

Page 23: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 23

L

H0,1

HB,1

H0,2

HB,2

DB

z

W(z)

Layer 1

Layer 2

The effective width W(z) of the bed is given as:

( )[ ] 5.04)( zDzzW B −=

Where:

BD = Column diameter

z = Height of adsorbent above column base

The effective cross-sectional flow area of the bed is the product of the width and the total horizontal length of the bed, that is, W(z)L.

Page 24: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 24

Radial Bed Type

Use a radial bed type when the flow through the bed is in the radial direction, from a central core to the outer circumference of the packed bed.

Product

Feed

AdsorbentLayer 1Inner Core

Bed Shell

AdsorbentLayer 2

The volumes of the central core and the bed shell are the dead volumes of the column. The positive radial co-ordinate runs from the center of the bed to the outer circumference.

Configure Form (gas): Spatial Dimensions If you select a vertical bed type, you need to specify either one- or two-dimensional spatial discretization:

• One-dimensional discretization Spatial derivatives are evaluated in axial (flow) direction only.

• Two dimensional discretization Second order spatial derivatives are evaluated in both the axial and radial direction, allowing the calculation of radial composition and temperature distributions.

Page 25: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 25

Configure Form (gas): Internal Heat Exchanger The adsorption columns used in some temperature swing adsorption processes are equipped with internal heat exchangers to improve adsorbent regeneration. Aspen Adsim can simulate this configuration through the following sub-options:

• None, that is, no heat exchanger

• 1-Phase, internal

• 1-Phase, jacket

• Steam-Water, internal

• Steam-Water, jacket

The heat exchanger operates either as a jacket encircling the adsorption column or is integrated into the packed bed of the adsorbent. The heat exchange medium remains in the phase it is supplied in, or is condensed in order to use its heat of evaporation to heat the bed.

Heat Exchange Jacket

Internal Heat Exchanger

Page 26: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 26

Configure Layer Form (gas) Use the options in the Configure Layer Form to specify the bed layers.

The form has the following tabs:

• General tab

• Material/Momentum Balance tab

• Kinetic Model tab

• Isotherm Tab

• Energy Balance tab

• Reaction tab

• Procedures tab

General Tab (gas) Use the General tab to specify the numerical options for solving the partial differential equations, and to select the gas model assumption.

General Tab (gas): Discretization Method to be used These discretization methods are available for gas phase adsorption processes:

• UDS1

• UDS2

• CDS1

• CDS2

• LDS

• QDS

• MIXED

• Flux Limiter

• BUDS

• FROMM

Page 27: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 27

General Tab (gas): Number of Nodes In the Number of Nodes box, choose an appropriate number of axial nodes for your chosen discretization method.

General Tab (gas): Number of Radial Nodes The Number of Radial Nodes option is available only if you selected a vertical bed with a 2-D spatial dimension.

Choose an appropriate number of radial nodes. The derivatives in the component material balances and the gas phase energy balances are second order in radial co-ordinates, and are approximated by central differences.

General Tab (gas): Flux Limiter to be used If flux limiter is your discretization method, choose from:

• van Leer

• OSPRE

• SMART

General Tab (gas): Gas Model Assumption Gas flowing through the packed bed can be ideal or non-ideal. The gas model defines the relationship between pressure, temperature and molar density:

ggTRZP ρ= (overall) or

igi cTRZPy = (component)

Where:

P = Pressure

Z = Compressibility factor

R = Universal gas constant

gT = Gas phase temperature

gρ = Molar gas phase density

iy = Mole fraction of component i

ic = Molar concentration of component i

Page 28: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 28

In the Gas Model Assumption box, choose from:

• Ideal Gas Law (where Z=1)

• Fixed Compressibility (where Z is constant)

• User Procedure Compressibility (where Z is supplied through a user Fortran subroutine interfaced by the procedure pUser_g_Compressibility, or calculated using a selected physical properties package)

• User Submodel Compressibility (where Z is supplied through the user submodel gUserCompressibility)

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (gas) Use the Material/Momentum Balance tab to specify the material and momentum balances, and the 2-D dispersive properties.

About Axial Dispersion in Gas Adsorption Processes As a fluid flows through a packed column, axial mixing tends to occur. This reduces the efficiency of separation so should be minimized in column design. However, if axial dispersion occurs, the model must account for its effects.

In gases, there are three main sources of axial dispersion:

• From wall effects, due to non-uniformity of packing either at the wall (wall effects) or in the core section of the packing (channeling). You can avoid this type of dispersion by having a sufficiently large ratio of bed-to-particle diameters.

• From molecular diffusion effects.

• From turbulent mixing effects arising from the splitting and recombining of flows around the adsorbent particles.

In general, the molecular diffusion and turbulent mixing effect are additive and proportional to the second order spatial concentration derivative, so they can be lumped together into a single effective dispersion coefficient, iE .

The dispersion term in the material balance is typically expressed as:

2

2

zc

E kzki ∂

∂ε−

Where:

iε = Interparticle voidage

zkE = Axial dispersion coefficient of component k

The type of flow determines whether this term is included or omitted in the material balance.

Page 29: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 29

It is useful to work out the Peclet number Pe using a dispersion coefficient (effective bulk diffusivity zE ), typical bed velocities ( gν ), and bed height

( bH ):

Pev HEg b

z=

The Peclet number quantifies the degree of dispersion introduced into the system. It is dimensionless so is more convenient to use for this purpose than the dispersion coefficient.

The following table shows the effect of different values of Peclet number:

If the Peclet number is

The effect of axial dispersion on bed performance is

0 Infinite: the bulk gas is perfectly mixed and the gas is homogeneous through the entire bed.

< 30 Significant.

> 100 Very slight: The bed operates under near plug flow conditions.

∞ Zero: The bed operates under plug flow conditions.

Note: The numerical methods used to model the spatial derivatives in the general equations can also introduce an artificial form of dispersion.

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (gas): Material Balance Assumption The Material Balance Assumption option is available unless you previously chose vertical bed and two-dimensional bed discretization. Choose from these options:

• Convection Only

• Convection with Constant Dispersion

• Convection with Estimated Dispersion

• Convection with User Submodel Dispersion

• Convection with User Procedure Dispersion

Material Balance Assumption (gas): Convection Only

The Convection Only option drops the dispersion term from the material balance, so the model represents plug flow with a zero dispersion coefficient (infinite Peclet number). Because the dispersion term is missing, you need not supply the dispersion coefficient.

Page 30: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 30

Material Balance Assumption (gas): Convection with Constant Dispersion

The Convection with Constant Dispersion option assumes that the dispersion coefficient is constant for all components throughout the bed. You supply its value.

Material Balance Assumption (gas): Convection with Estimated Dispersion

The Convection with Estimated Dispersion option assumes that the dispersion coefficient varies along the length of the bed. Aspen Adsim estimates the values during the simulation.

Aspen Adsim estimates the components' dispersion coefficients using the following correlation, (Kast, 1988):

+

+=

pg

mkii

pgmkzk

rvD

rvDE

249.91

73.0ε

ε

Where:

gν = Gas velocity

mkD = Molecular diffusivity

zkE = Axial dispersion coefficient

iε = Interparticle voidage

pr = Particle radius

Material Balance Assumption (gas): Convection with User Submodel Dispersion

If you choose Convection with User Submodel Dispersion, the (varying) dispersion coefficient is estimated using the user submodel gUserDispersion.

Material Balance Assumption (gas): Convection with User Procedure Dispersion

If you choose Convection with User Procedure Dispersion, the (varying) dispersion coefficient is estimated through a user-supplied Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces through the procedure pUser_g_Dispersion.

Page 31: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 31

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (gas): Momentum Balance Assumption Use the Momentum Balance Assumption box to specify how the adsorption bed layer model treats gas velocity and pressure. Base your choice on the plant operating conditions and the envisaged scope of the simulation (constant pressure models are only applicable for breakthrough investigations).

Choose from:

Constant pressure optionsThe bed is driven by gas superficial velocity and the pressure is assumed constant in the bed. The bed is velocity-driven, and no momentum balance is needed. These models are applicable only for breakthrough investigations.

The constant pressure options are:

• Constant Pressure and Velocity

• Constant Pressure with Varying Velocity

Pressure driven optionsThe velocity is related to the overall or internal pressure gradients. In such cases, velocity and pressure gradient are related through a momentum balance. The pressure-drop relationships apply to local conditions inside the bed, so the momentum equations for entire beds can be used to determine local pressure gradients. No simplifying assumptions are made regarding the gas densities, gas velocities, or pressures.

The pressure driven options are:

• Darcy's Law

• Karman-Kozeny Equation

• Burke-Plummer Equation

• Ergun Equation

Momentum Balance Assumption (gas): Constant Pressure and Velocity

Use the Constant Pressure and Velocity option only when using a simple flowsheet to simulate the breakthrough behavior of an adsorption column.

The gas velocity and pressure are constant along the bed, whilst the gas density is essentially constant along the bed. These assumptions are valid only when dealing with the removal of trace components from a bulk carrier gas.

Momentum Balance Assumption (gas): Constant Pressure with Varying Velocity

Use the Constant Pressure with Varying Velocity option only when using a simple flowsheet to simulate the breakthrough behavior of an adsorption column.

Gas density is constant along the bed, so the pressure does not vary axially. Superficial velocity varies along the bed due to the rate at which the gas is adsorbed onto the solid, or desorbed from it.

Page 32: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 32

This option is applicable to bulk separation applications, in which case the axial velocity profile is determined by an overall material balance rather than an axial pressure gradient.

Momentum Balance Assumption (gas): Darcy's Law

Use this option to apply a linear relationship between the gas superficial velocity and the pressure gradient at a particular point in a bed.

Darcy's law states that pressure drop is directly proportional to flow rate. You have to set the proportionality constant. The relationship is given as:

gpKzP ν

∂∂

−=

Where:

pK = Darcys law proportionality constant

gν = Gas velocity

Momentum Balance Assumption (gas): Karman-Kozeny Equation

Choose this option to use the Karman-Kozeny equation to relate velocity to pressure drop. This is the laminar component of the Ergun equation:

( ) gip

i vrz

P32

23

2)1(105.1

εψεµ

∂∂ −×−

=−

For details of the Karman-Kozeny model see Bird et al. (1960).

Where:

ψ = Shape factor

µ = Dynamic gas viscosity

Momentum Balance Assumption (gas): Burke-Plummer Equation

This option uses the Burke-Plummer equation to relate velocity to pressure gradient:

23

5

2)1(

1075.1 gip

ig vr

MzP

ψεερ

∂∂ −

×−= −

Where:

M = Molecular weight

The equation is valid for fully turbulent conditions when the particle Reynolds number Re is:

10002

>=µ

ρ gpg vrMRe

For details of the Burke-Plummer model, see Bird et al. (1960).

Page 33: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 33

Momentum Balance Assumption (gas): Ergun Equation

This option uses the Ergun equation, which combines the description of pressure drops by the Karman-Kozeny equation for laminar flow and the Burke-Plummer equation for turbulent flow.

( )

−×+

−×−= −

−2

3

532

23

2)1(

1075.1 2

)1(105.1g

ip

igg

ip

i vr

Mvrz

Pψεε

ρµεψ

ε∂∂

It is valid for both laminar and turbulent flow, and is the most popular option.

For details of the Ergun model, see Bird et al. (1960).

Set Variables for Pressure-Drop Options (gas)

This table shows the variables you need to specify for the pressure drop options:

Equation Symbol Variable Definition

pK Kp Proportionality constant

ψ Sfac Sphericity

pr Rp Particle radius

iε Ei Interparticle voidage

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (gas): 2-D Dispersive Properties The 2-D Dispersive Properties option is available only if you selected vertical bed and two-dimensional discretization. The axial dispersion is calculated from:

2

2

zc

E kzki ∂

∂ε−

Additionally, a radial dispersion term is also evaluated:

∂∂

−rc

rrr

E krki ∂

∂ε 1

If you later specify the process as non-isothermal, equivalent dispersive terms are evaluated for the gas and solid phase energy balances. Namely:

• Gas phase thermal conduction in axial direction: 2

2

zT

k ggzi ∂

∂− ε

• Gas phase thermal conduction in radial direction:

∂∂

−rT

rrr

k ggri

Page 34: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 34

• Solid phase thermal conduction in axial direction: 2

2

zTk s

sz ∂∂

• Solid phase thermal conduction in radial direction:

∂∂

∂∂

−rTr

rrk ssr

1

Choose from:

• Fixed

• Estimated

2-D Dispersive Properties (gas): Fixed

Choose this option if the dispersive properties are constant throughout the packed bed. You must supply values for:

• zkE : The dispersion coefficient of component k for the axial direction.

• rkE : The dispersion coefficient of component k for the radial direction.

For non-isothermal operation, you must give values for the following thermal conductivities:

• gk : The effective thermal conductivity of the gas phase.

• sk : The effective thermal conductivity of the solid phase.

2-D Dispersive Properties (gas): Estimated

Choose this option when variables such as pressure, temperature and velocity are changing significantly through the column. These variables influence the values of dispersion coefficients and thermal conductivities.

The axial dispersion coefficient is estimated using the following correlation, (Kast, 1988):

+

+=

pg

mkii

pgmkzk

rvD

rvDE

249.91

73.0ε

ε

Where:

gν = Gas Velocity

mkD = Molecular diffusivity of component k

zkE = Axial dispersion coefficient of component k

iε = Interparticle voidage

pr = Particle radius

Page 35: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 35

The radial dispersion coefficient is evaluated according to (Carberry, 1976):

4gp

rk

vrE =

Where:

rkE = Radial dispersion coefficient of component k

Assuming the analogy between mass and heat transfer is valid, the effective gas phase thermal conductivity in the axial direction is:

( )∑=

=nc

iiizpgggz yECk

1,ρ

Where:

gzk = Effective gas phase thermal conductivity in axial direction

gρ = Molar gas density

pgC = Molar specific heat capacity at constant volume

The effective gas phase thermal conductivity in the radial direction comprises a static and a dynamic contribution (Froment and Bischoff, 1990). The two contributions are additive. Assuming the validity of the analogy between heat and mass transfer, the dynamic contribution to the effective radial gas phase thermal conductivity is:

( )∑=

=nc

kkrkpggi

dyngr yECk

1ρε

Where:

dyngrk = Dynamic contribution to the effective gas phase thermal

conductivity in radial direction

As the adsorbent (a solid) is not in motion, it has no dynamic contribution to its effective thermal conductivity in the radial direction.

Page 36: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 36

The static contribution of the gas phase effective thermal conductivity in the radial direction is:

( )rgpgistatgr rkk αβε 2+=

Where:

0.1=β = Factor

( )

33

100112

1

10227.0

−−

+

×=

− T

pprg

εε

α = Radiation contribution

p = Emissivity

gk = Thermal conductivity of the gas.

The total effective radial gas phase thermal conductivity is now given by:

statgr

dyngrgr kkk +=

The effective radial solid phase thermal conductivity comes from:

( )

sprs

g

istatsrsr

kr

k

kkγ

αφ

εβ

++

−==

2

11

Where:

33

100210227.0

−×= − T

pp

rsα = Radiation contribution

28.0=φ = Function of the packing density

32

=γ = Factor

sk = Thermal conductivity of the solid

Aspen Adsim assumes that the effective solid thermal conductivity in the axial direction is not a function of any process variables, so sk is constant through

the simulation.

Page 37: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 37

Kinetic Model Tab (gas) Use the Kinetic Model tab to specify the model kinetics, such as resistances, diffusivities and mass transfer coefficients.

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Film Model Assumption In the Film Model Assumption box, choose from:

• Solid, where the mass transfer driving force is expressed as a function of the solid phase loading.

• Fluid, where the mass transfer driving force is expressed as a function of the gas phase concentration.

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Kinetic Model Assumption Typically, several mass transfer resistances occur in gas phase adsorption processes:

• Mass transfer resistance between the bulk gas phase and the gas-solid interface.

• Mass transfer resistance due to the porous structure of the adsorbent. In cases where the adsorbent has two distinct pore size regions, such as macropores and micropores, the resistance can be subdivided to account separately for each region.

You can consider mass transfer resistances in one these ways:

• Lumped Resistance Separate mass transfer resistances are lumped as a single overall factor, or one resistance dominates all others.

• Micro & Macro Pore The effects of the individual resistances to mass transfer in the micro- and macropores can be accounted for individually.

• Particle MB Where all components are adsorbed and the adsorbent has a homogenous pore structure, you can use a rigorous particle material balance to determine the loading profile inside the adsorbent.

• Particle MB 2 Where inert components are present, or the radial gas phase concentration profiles in the pores of the adsorbent particles are to be accounted for in addition to the loading profiles. The adsorbent should possess a homogenous pore structure. This option performs a rigorous particle material balance for both the adsorbed and the gas phases.

Page 38: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 38

In the Kinetic Model Assumption box, choose from these options:

• Lumped Resistance

• Micro and Macro Pore Effects

• Particle MB

• Particle MB 2

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Kinetic Model Assumption (gas): Lumped Resistance

Here, the separate resistances to mass transfer is lumped as a single overall factor, or one mass transfer resistance dominates the others.

Kinetic Model Assumption (gas): Micro and Macro Pore Effects

Two concentration gradients greatly affect the diffusion rate:

• Within the pores of the solid.

• Within the void spaces between the particles (that is, within the crystallines).

Under practical conditions in gas separation, pore diffusion limits the overall mass transfer rate between the bulk flow and the internal surface of a particle. This gives importance to the effect of pore diffusion on the dynamics of absorbers.

The following table shows the difference between modeling macropore and micropore resistance in composite and uniform adsorbents:

Pore structure Example(s) Micropore

diffusional resistance

Macropore diffusional resistance

Uniform Activated carbon alumina silica molecular sieve carbon

High Negligible

Composite Zeolites High High

When modeling adsorbents with uniform pore structure, you can usually discount any macropore diffusional resistance. However, when modeling composite adsorbents, both resistances can be significant and should be accounted for.

Qualitatively, a higher pore diffusion rate results in a sharper and steeper concentration wave front, giving a better separation. Quantitative prediction of behavior requires the simultaneous solution of the mass balance within the particle, as well as for the bulk flow in the bed.

Solving the mass balance equation within the particle is usually complex. However, you can simplify the mass balance equation in two ways:

• Use expressions that relate the overall uptake rate to the bulk flow concentration:

( )isiads cftw

J i ==∂

∂ρ,

Page 39: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 39

Where:

sρ = Adsorbent bulk density

iw = Loading of component i due to adsorption

iadsJ , = Mass transfer rate of component i

• If you know the concentration profile within the particle, you can make considerable savings in numerical computation because integration along the radial distance in the particle is no longer necessary. Several researchers have recently shown that profiles obtained by exact numerical solutions of both Pressure Swing and Thermal Swing Adsorption processes are usually parabolic in shape, so you can model pore diffusion by assuming a parabolic concentration profile within the particle.

The model developed for particle diffusion accounts for both interparticle (macropore) and intraparticle (micorpore) diffusion effects. The model assumes that material flows first from the bulk gas to the macropores (crystallines), and then from the macropores to the solid surface via the micropores:

rP

2rc

Interpelletporosity

MicroporeBulk Gas Macropore Solid

Surface

Bulk:cbk, εB, wbk

Macropores:wmsk, cmsk

InterpelletVoidage: εi

Pellet(macroparticle)

IntrapelletPorosity εPSolid

MicroporousParticles: wk, ck

cbk, εB, wbk cmsk, (1-εi) εP, wmsk

εi

ck, wk

* *

* * *

*

The material balance model assumes that:

• Radial concentration profile within the particle is parabolic.

• Concentration profile within the particle is radially symmetric.

• Radial dispersion is negligible.

Page 40: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 40

Gas Phase

The component balance in the bulk gas phase is of the form:

( ) ( ) ( ) 011 =∂

∂−+

∂∂

−+∂

∂+

∂∂

tc

tw

tc

zvc msk

pik

spbk

Bgbk εερεε

[Convection] + [accumulation] + [mass transfer (accumulation) to micropore] + [mass transfer (accumulation) to macropore]

In the given example, the gas phase material balance is written for a convection only situation in a vertical, one-dimensional adsorption layer.

Macropore (Crystalline)

The material balance in the macropore is given as:

Fluid Film Model:

( ) ( ) ( )mskbkmack

spmsk

pi ccKtw

tc

−=∂

∂−+

∂∂

− ρεεε 11

[accumulation] + [mass transfer to micropore] = [rate of mass transfer from bulk gas]

Solid Film Model:

( ) ( ) ( ) ( )**111 mskbkmacspk

spmsk

pi wwKtw

tc

−−=∂

∂−+

∂∂

− ρερεεε

Micropore (Particle)

Fluid Film Model:

( ) ( )*1 kmskmick

sp ccKtw

−=∂

∂− ρε

[accumulation] = [rate of mass transfer from macropore]

Solid Film Model:

( ) ( ) ( )kskmicspk

sp wwKtw

−−=∂

∂− *11 ρερε

[accumulation] = [rate of mass transfer from macropore]

Specifying Particle Resistance Coefficients

If you choose Micro & Macro Pore Effects, you must specify the values of the macropore and micropore resistances: macK and micK . The following options

are available in the Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient field.

Page 41: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 41

Constant

This option forces the particle resistance coefficients to be constant throughout the bed. Set the coefficients in the variable arrays Kmac and Kmic.

The macropore constant macK is given by:

20.15P

efPmac r

DK =

Where:

efPD = Component diffusivities in macropores

pr = Particle radius

The micropore constant micK is given by:

20.15c

efcmic r

DK =

Where:

efcD = Component diffusivities in micropores

cr = Microparticle radius

Estimated

This option uses a submodel in which Aspen Adsim automatically estimates the coefficients.

User Procedure

If you choose this option, the bed model is written so that the component rates of mass transfer are related to local conditions in the bed through the procedure type pUser_g_Kinetic.

),,,,,( gisigi vwTcPTftw

=∂

Note: Langmuir adsorption kinetics is quite a popular option, and can be applied with such a procedure.

User Submodel

The name of the submodel is gUserKinetic.

Page 42: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 42

Kinetic Model Assumption (gas): Particle MB

This option determines the loading and gas phase concentration profiles inside an adsorbent particle, by rigorously solving the particle material balance for both phases. For this to work, the following conditions must be met:

• Adsorbent has a uniform pore structure.

• Effective gas phase diffusion coefficient is calculated from the molecular and the Knudsen diffusion coefficients.

• Effective diffusivities for the gas and adsorbed phase are independent of the location inside the particle.

The Particle Material Balance option considers two mass transfer resistances:

• The intraparticle mass transfer resistance, which is the diffusional resistance inside the particle pore structure, caused by both gas and adsorbed phase diffusion.

• The interparticle mass transfer resistance, which is the resistance to mass transfer posed by the boundary layer between particle surface and bulk gas.

The following figure illustrates these resistances:

Page 43: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 43

rrp

BulkGas

BoundaryLayer Adsorbent

Particle (UniformPore Structure)

ci

ci*

wi*

wi(r)

00

=∂

=r

i

rwJi

prr

i

rw

=∂∂

( ) ( )*iif

rr

ieisi ccka

rwDaJ

p

−ε−=∂

∂ρ=

=

1

The particle material balance is expressed as:

022

2

=

∂+

∂∂

−∂

∂rw

rw

rD

tw kk

ekk

Where:

kw = Loading

ekD = Effective adsorbed phase diffusion coefficient

r = Radial particle co-ordinate

The effective diffusion coefficient is assumed constant throughout the particle. It is calculated from the particle location inside the adsorber (axial and radial column co-ordinate) using the procedure pUser_g_De or submodel gUserEffDiff.

Page 44: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 44

The boundary conditions for this partial differential equation come from both the symmetry condition at r=0:

00

=∂∂

=r

i

rw

and the material flux through the boundary layer at prr = :

( ) ( )*1 kkfkirr

keks ccka

rw

Dap

−−=∂

=

ερ

Where:

a = Specific particle surface

sρ = Bulk density of solid

iε = Interparticle voidage

fkk = Boundary layer mass transfer coefficient

kc = Gas phase concentration

*kc = Interface gas phase concentration

The gas phase composition and the loading are coupled by the condition that thermodynamic equilibrium has been achieved at the interface between gas phase and particle:

( )**ieqrrii cfww

p==

=

Where:

eqf = Isotherm equation

*iw = Loading at prr =

The boundary layer mass transfer coefficient is expressed using the following Sherwood number correlation:

6.03/11.12 ReScSh ii +=

Where:

mi

pfii D

rkSh

2= = Sherwood number

MDSc

gmii ρ

µ= = Schmidt number

µρ gpg Mrv

Re2

= = Reynolds number

Page 45: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 45

miD = Mean molecular diffusion coefficient

µ = Gas phase dynamic viscosity

gρ = Molar gas phase density

M = Mean molecular weight

gν = Superficial velocity

Kinetic Model Assumption (gas): Particle MB 2

This option determines the loading and gas phase concentration profiles inside an adsorbent particle, by rigorously solving the particle material balance for both phases. For this to work:

• Adsorbent has a uniform pore structure.

• Effective gas phase diffusion coefficient is calculated from the molecular and the Knudsen diffusion coefficients.

• Effective diffusivities for gas and adsorbed phase are independent of the location inside the particle.

The Particle Material Balance 2 option considers two mass transfer resistances:

• The intraparticle mass transfer resistance, which is the diffusional resistance inside the particle pore structure, caused by both gas and adsorbed phase diffusion.

• The interparticle mass transfer resistance, which is the resistance to mass transfer posed by the boundary layer between particle surface and bulk gas.

The following figure illustrates these resistances:

Page 46: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 46

r

rp

BulkGas

BoundaryLayer Adsorbent

Particle (UniformPore Structure)

ci

ci*

wi*

wi(r)

00

=∂

=r

i

rwJi

prr

i

rw

=∂∂

( ) ( )

( ) 30

2

30

2

*,

31

3

1

p

r pi

pp

ri

si

iifrr

pi

iprr

iei

s

r

drrtc

r

drrtw

J

cckrcD

rwD

pp

pp

∫∫ ∂∂

−+∂

=

−=∂

∂+

∂∂

−==

εερ

ερ

prr

pi

rc

=∂

0=∂

= prr

pi

rc

(r)cpi

The particle material balance is given by:

021

21 2

2

2

2

=

∂+

∂∂

−−

∂+

∂∂

−∂

∂−

+∂

∂rw

rw

rD

rc

rc

rD

tw

tc kks

ek

pk

pk

pkks

pk

p ερ

ερε

Where:

ε = Interparticle voidage

pε = Intraparticle voidage

sρ = Bulk density

kw = Loading

pkc = Gas phase concentration

Page 47: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 47

ekD = Effective adsorbed phase diffusion coefficient

pkD = Effective pore gas phase diffusion coefficient

r = Radial particle co-ordinate

The effective adsorbed phase diffusion coefficient is assumed constant through the particle. You calculate it from the particle location inside the adsorber (given by the axial and radial column co-ordinate), using the procedure pUser_g_De or the submodel gUserEffDiff.

The effective pore gas diffusion coefficient is calculated from the molecular diffusion coefficient and the Knudsen diffusion coefficient:

+=

miKippi DDTort

D111

ε

and

5.0

97

=

iPoreKi M

TrD

Where:

Tort = Tortuosity of adsorbent

piD = Effective pore gas diffusion coefficient

KiD = Knudsen diffusion coefficient

miD = Molecular diffusion coefficient of component i in the mixture

Porer = Pore radius in adsorbent

T = Adsorbent temperature

iM = Molecular weight of component i

The boundary conditions for this partial differential equation come from both the symmetry condition at r=0:

00

=∂∂

=r

i

rw

and

00

=∂

=r

pi

rc

Page 48: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 48

and the material flux through the boundary layer at prr = :

( ) ( )

( ) 30

2

30

2

*,

31

3

1

p

r pi

pp

ri

si

iifirr

pi

iprr

iei

s

r

drrtc

r

drrtw

J

cckrcD

rwD

pp

pp

∫∫ ∂∂

−+∂

=

−=∂

∂+

∂∂

−==

εερ

ερ

Where:

sρ = Bulk density of solid

ε = Interparticle voidage

pε = Interparticle voidage

fik = Boundary layer mass transfer coefficient

ic = Bulk gas phase concentration

*ic = Interface gas phase concentration

pic = Pore gas phase concentration

iw = Loading

iJ = Material flux

pr = particle radius

piD = Effective gas phase pore diffusion coefficient

eiD = Effective adsorbed phase diffusion coefficient

The gas phase concentration and the loading are coupled by the condition that thermodynamic equilibrium has been at each radial location inside particle, so:

( )pieqi cfw =

Where:

eqf = Isotherm equation

pic = Pore gas phase concentration

iw = Loading

These calculations give the isotherm correlation at each radial node, which increases the computational effort.

Page 49: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 49

The boundary layer mass transfer coefficient is given by the following Sherwood number correlation:

6.03/11.12 ReScSh ii +=

Where:

mi

pfii D

rkSh

2= = Sherwood number

MDSc

gmii ρ

µ= = Schmidt number

µρ gpg Mrv

Re2

= = Reynolds number

miD = Mean molecular diffusion coefficient

µ = Gas phase dynamic viscosity

gρ = Molar gas phase density

M = Mean molecular weight

gν = Superficial velocity

Kinetic Model Assumption (gas): User Procedure

With this option, the bed model relates component rates of mass transfer to local conditions in the bed through the procedure pUser_g_Kinetic.

),,,,,( gisigi vwTcPTftw

=∂

Note: Langmuir adsorption kinetics is quite a popular option, and can be applied with such a procedure.

Kinetic Model Assumption (gas): User Submodel

With this option, the bed model relates component rates of mass transfer to local conditions in the bed through the submodel gUserKineticModel.

),,,,,( gisigi vwTcPTftw

=∂

Note: Langmuir adsorption kinetics is quite a popular option, and can be applied with such a procedure.

Page 50: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 50

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Form of Lumped Resistance Model Use the Lumped Resistance option to select the overall form of the mass transfer rate model. This option determines how the model relates the mass transfer rate due to adsorption ( iadsJ , ), to the local gas and solid states. The

mass transfer rate is related to the adsorbent uptake, as follows:

iadsi

s Jtw

,=∂

∂ρ

If you chose Lumped Resistance as the kinetic model assumption, in the Form of the Lumped Resistance Model box, you need to choose between the following driving force expressions:

• Linear

• Quadratic

Form of Lumped Resistance Model (gas): Linear

The mass transfer driving force for component i is a linear function of the gas phase concentration (fluid film) or solid phase loading (solid film).

Fluid:

( )*iigi

is ccMTCtw

−=∂

∂ρ

Solid:

( )iisii wwMTCtw

−=∂

∂ *

Form of Lumped Resistance Model (gas): Quadratic

The mass transfer driving force is a quadratic function of the fluid film concentration or solid film loading.

Fluid:

( ) ( )i

iigi

is c

ccMTC

tw

2

2*2 −=

∂∂

ρ

Solid:

( ) ( )i

iisi

i

www

MTCtw

2

22* −=

∂∂

Page 51: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 51

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Molecular Diffusivities This option applies if you previously selected one of the following options:

• Particle MB as your kinetic model assumption.

• Estimated as your form of mass transfer coefficient.

In either case, mean gas phase molecular diffusivities are required for the calculation of film mass transfer coefficients. These mass transfer coefficients describe the resistance against mass transfer posed by the boundary layer surrounding the adsorbent particle.

rP

2rc

Interpelletporosity

MicroporeBulk Gas Macropore Solid

Surface

Bulk:cbk, εB, wbk

Macropores:wmsk, cmsk

InterpelletVoidage: εi

Pellet(macroparticle)

IntrapelletPorosity εPSolid

MicroporousParticles: wk, ck

cbk, εB, wbk cmsk, (1-εi) εP, wmsk

εi

ck, wk

* *

* * *

*

Typically, the mass transfer coefficients are evaluated from Sherwood or Colburn j-factor correlations.

Values and estimation equations for diffusion coefficients for various gases are given by Bird et al. (1960) and Reid et al. (1977), for example.

Molecular Diffusivities (gas): Fixed

The mean molecular diffusion coefficients are fixed for each component. You supply a value for each component into the array Dm(*) of the adsorbent layer model.

Page 52: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 52

Molecular Diffusivities (gas): User Procedure

You supply the mean gas phase diffusion coefficients using a Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces through the procedure pUser_g_Diffusivity.

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients If you selected either Lumped Resistance or Micro & Macropore for your kinetic model assumption then, in the Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients box, choose from these options:

• Arrhenius

• Constant

• Estimated

• Pressure Dependent Arrhenius

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients (gas): Arrhenius

This option evaluates the mass transfer coefficient as a function of temperature from an Arrhenius type equation:

=RTE

kMTC actiii exp0

To use this option, you must supply the pre-exponential factor ik0 and the

activation energy actiE for each component i, as fixed variables in the Specify

table for the adsorbent layer.

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients (gas): Constant

Here, the mass transfer coefficient for each component is constant throughout the bed. You must supply a constant value of mass transfer coefficient for each component in the Specify table for the adsorbent layer.

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients (gas): Estimated

If you have selected Lumped Resistance as your kinetic model assumption, and Estimated in the Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients box, choose the Estimated Mass Transfer Coefficient Assumption from:

• Micro and Macro Pores Considered

• Macropore Only

Page 53: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 53

Methods exist in the literature for estimating the mass transfer coefficient as a function of the supplied isotherm. One such method is based on the Henry's Coefficient. These methods rarely provide exact values; they are approximations that serve only as rough guides. They usually need to be fine-tuned. You can fine-tune the values by adjusting the estimated values until the timing and shape of the simulated breakthrough curves match the experimentally measured breakthrough curves.

In general, the adsorption rate model for component i can be expressed as:

( ) ( )**iiKiiiii

i ccKkwwktw

−=−=∂

The effective mass transfer coefficient is given as a lumped term comprising the external film resistance term, the macropore diffusion term, and the micropore diffusion term:

ciKi

c

pip

p

fi

p

i DKr

Kr

kr

k 151531 22

++=ε

The Henry's coefficient KiK is obtained from the isotherm as:

i

i

i

iKi P

wRT

cw

K∂∂

=∂∂

=**

The dimensionless Henrys coefficient, KiK , is obtained by:

i

sKiKi KK

ερ

=

The film resistance coefficient fik is obtained from the Sherwood number as:

p

miifi rD

Shk2

=

Where:

iSh = 6.03/11.10.2 ReSci+

Re = Reynolds number

iSc = Schmidt number = ( )smiD ρµ

The macropore diffusion coefficient piK is obtained from:

+=

miKipi DDTort

K111

Page 54: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 54

The Knudsen diffusion coefficient KiD is:

5.0

97

=

iPoreKi M

TrD

Where:

gρ = Gas density

ciD = Micropore diffusion coefficient

KiD = Knudsen diffusion coefficient

miD = Multi-component molecular diffusion coefficient

pe = particle (macro) porosity

ik = effective mass transfer coefficient

KiK = Henry's coefficient

fik = Film resistance coefficient

piK = Macropore diffusion coefficient

w = Loading

R = Universal Gas Constant

cr = Radius of crystalline or primary micropore

pr = Particle radius

Tort = Tortuosity factor

µ = Dynamic viscosity

To include the effect of the micropore resistance in the estimated values for the mass transfer coefficients:

• Give values for the micropore diffusion coefficients and the radius of the primary micropore.

To ignore the micropore effect:

• In the Estimated Mass Transfer Coefficient Assumption box, select Macropore only.

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients (gas): Pressure Dependent Arrhenius

This option is based on the Arrhenius model, but also accounts for changes in total pressure. As such it is especially suitable for PSA systems. The model was found to represent experimental data well.

Page 55: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 55

=RTE

Pk

MTC actiPii exp0

You have to supply the pre-exponential factor Pik0 and the activation energy

actiE for each component i, as fixed variables in the Specify table for the

adsorbent layer.

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients (gas): User Procedure

Here, the mass transfer coefficients are estimated using a Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces through the procedure pUser_g_MTC.

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficients (gas): User Submodel

If you choose this option, the mass transfer coefficients are estimated and then returned through the submodel gUserMTC.

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Apply Cyclic Correction This option is available only if you selected Lumped Resistance as your kinetic model assumption, and either Constant or Estimated in the Form Of Mass Transfer Coefficient box. Furthermore, this option applies only to cyclic processes and especially PSA systems. The Glueckauf (see Yang, 1987 for example) approximation of a lumped mass transfer coefficient states:

2,P

eiis r

DMTC Ω=

with Ω=15. Nakao and Suzuki (1983) showed that the value of 15 underestimates the magnitude of the mass transfer coefficient for short adsorption times. Assuming that an adsorption column is in adsorbing mode for about half the total time of the adsorption cycle, the following time constant can be calculated:

CycleP

e trD

25.0=θ

The parameter Ω is a function of θ:

162.5 : 001.0

5.14 : 1.0001.0

15 : 1.0

=≤

=<≤

=≥

Ωθθ

Ωθ

Ωθ

The above equations are evaluated automatically by Aspen Adsim when you select this option.

Page 56: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 56

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Estimated Mass Transfer Coefficient Assumption This option is available only if you selected Estimated as your estimated mass transfer coefficient.

Gas Adsorption Layer (gas): Particle Material Balance, Number of Nodes This option is available only if you selected Particle MB or Particle MB 2 as your kinetic model assumption. It determines how many nodes to use for the central finite difference discretization of the second order derivative in the particle material balance:

( ) ( )211112

2

22

21r

wwwrww

rrwr

rrkkkkk

k ∆∆−+−+ +−

+−

∂∂

∂∂

Kinetic Model Tab (gas): Particle Material Balance, Effective Diffusivity This option is available only if you selcted Particle MB or Particle MB 2 as your Kinetic Model Assumption. With this option, the form of the effective adsorbed phase diffusion coefficient is determined. Choose one of three options:

• Fixed

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Particle Material Balance, Effective Diffusivity (gas): Fixed

With this option, the effective diffusion coefficients for each component in the adsorbed phase are given a constant value, which you supply through the array De(*) of the adsorbent layer model.

Particle Material Balance, Effective Diffusivity (gas): User Procedure

You supply the mean adsorbed phase diffusion coefficients using a Fortran subroutine, which Adsim interfaces through the procedure pUser_g_De.

Particle Material Balance, Effective Diffusivity (gas): User Submodel

You supply the mean adsorbed phase diffusion coefficients through the user submodel gUserEffDiff.

Page 57: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 57

Isotherm Tab (gas) Use the Isotherm tab to define the adsorption isotherms to be used in your gas adsorption process.

The Aspen Adsim isotherm models are expressed as functions of either partial pressures or concentrations. When you use Aspen Adsim isotherm models for pure components or for multi-component mixtures, you must supply isotherm parameters consistent with the functional form. It is imperative that you convert isotherm parameters to Aspen Adsim's base units of measurement, which are listed in the following table:

Variable Unit of measurement

Loading (w) kmol/kg

Gas phase concentration (c) kmol/m3

Pressure (P) bar

Temperature (T) K

About Adsorption Isotherms for Gas Adsorption Processes Adsorption is the tendency of molecules from an ambient fluid phase (gas or liquid) to stick to the surface of a solid. Most of the important industrial applications of adsorption depend on differences in the affinity of the solid surface for different components. Adsorption isotherms describe the tendency for the components to adsorb onto the solid; they describe the amount of each component adsorbed onto the solid at thermodynamic equilibrium. The driving force behind all adsorptive gas separation processes is the departure from adsorption equilibrium, so adsorption isotherms are crucially important data in the design of adsorbers.

If you know the adsorption isotherms for the components of the feed, you can create a bed model to predict the performance of the adsorber bed for the specified operating conditions.

Aspen Adsim has a comprehensive list of adsorption isotherms. You choose these isotherms from the Configurure Layer forms for the layers making up the bed model. This section explains these choices for pure component, multi-component, and user-supplied isotherms.

For more information, see Chapters 2 through 4 in Ruthven, 1984, Chapters 2 and 3 in Yang, 1987, and Chapter 3 in Kast, 1988 (German language).

Page 58: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 58

Guidelines for Choosing Aspen Adsim Isotherm Models (gas) Choose a model that is appropriate to the process you are investigating. The equilibrium specified by the isotherm model affects the driving force for mass transfer, so you can get significantly different simulation results when using different models, even if the model parameters are derived from exactly the same set of data.

The isotherm model parameters are always set variables. You can estimate these parameters from experimental data, or use published literature values.

Important: The expressions in this section are equilibrium equations. Depending on the mass transfer rate model you choose, the expressions compute either:

• w*, the loading which would be at equilibrium with the actual gas phase composition

- or -

• c*, the gas phase composition which would be at equilibrium with the actual loading.

The choice between w* and c* is automatically handled by Aspen Adsim.

Aspen Adsim names the equilibrium variable arrays (of size n or n×m) either Ws or Cs. In bed models, these variables are distributed axially, or axially and radially, and have indices to identify their location in the bed.

About Multi-Component Mixture Isotherms (gas) In adsorber design, you are usually interested in the adsorption equilibria of mixtures, rather than those of pure components. This is because adsorbed gas components interact on the solid surface, so individual gas components adsorb in a different fashion when mixed with other components. Mixture adsorption equilibria data are not readily available. Although measurements can be made, they are tedious and time-consuming to perform, so it is common practice to predict mixture isotherms from pure component isotherms.

Several methods for predicting mixture isotherms from pure component data have been proposed recently, including:

• Vacancy Solution

• Extended Langmuir Approach

• Ideal Adsorbed Solution

• Real Adsorbed Solution Theory

Most of the physical adsorption models contain two or three parameters, and the parameters for mixture isotherms are written as a function of the pure component parameters and the composition of the adsorbed phase.

Page 59: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 59

Vacancy Solution (gas)

The vacancy solution is the least popular of all the methods, but the approach has been developed in a limited number of cases for some single and multi-component systems.

Extended Langmuir Approach (gas)

This is an extension of the Langmuir isotherms for single components.

Langmuir models use a weighting factor to account for the inter-species interaction in mixtures.

The extended Langmuir approach takes a single component gas isotherm parameter and, depending on the components of the multi-component gas mixture, calculates a fitting parameter to account for the presence of other components. The values of the interaction parameters depend on all the species present. The value of the weighted inter-species interaction parameter is obtained from mixture experimental data.

Ideal Adsorbed Solution (gas)

Recently, the Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory (IAS) has become popular for multi-component mixtures. The method enables you to predict adsorption equilibria for components in a gaseous mixture. It requires data only for the pure-component adsorption equilibria at the same temperature and on the same adsorbent.

The model treats the mixed adsorbate phase as an ideal solution in equilibrium with the gas phase. The Gibbs approach is used for vapor-liquid equilibria, in which the fundamental equations of thermodynamic equilibrium are developed, and applies this to the gas-adsorbed phase equilibria.

At first sight, ideal behavior in the adsorbed phase seems improbable. However, many systems have shown strong correlation between experimental data and predictions by IAS theory, including binary and ternary mixtures on activated carbons, zeolites, and silica gel.

For a full description of the IAS approach, see Chapter 4 of Ruthven (1984) or Chapter 3 of Kast (1988) (German language).

IAS is available in Aspen Adsim. To use it, choose the appropriate isotherm on the Isotherm Tab of the layer configuration form.

The basic requirements for thermodynamic equilibrium between two phases are that the pressure, temperature and chemical potential of each component are equal in both phases.

The chemical potential for an adsorbed phase can be written as (Kast, 1988):

( ) ( ) ( )( ) ( )iiiiiiads xRTPRTTxT γΠµΠµ lnln,, 00, ++=

The chemical potential for an ideal gas phase is given by:

( ) ( )PyRTT iiigas ln0, += µµ

The equilibrium condition is:

iadsigas ,, µµ =

Page 60: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 60

Assuming ideal behavior in the adsorbed phase (that is, 1=iγ ), an expression

analogous to Raoults law can be derived:

( )Π0iii PxPy =

The pressure 0iP is a fictitious pure component gas phase pressure, which

gives the same spread pressure in the adsorbed phase as the gas mixture at

pressure P. The relationship between 0iP and the spreading pressure 0

iΠ is

derived using the Gibbs-Duhem equation for a single adsorbed component:

( )( )ΠµΠ 00000 ln( iiiii PRTdwdwAd ==

On integrating and using the pure component isotherm to replace 0iw :

( )dP

PIPPTf

RTA iP

eqi ∫=0

0

0 ,,Π

The equation set is completed with the following conditions:

∑=

=n

iix

11

∑=

=n

iiy

11

...000 === kji ΠΠΠ

The total loading and component loadings are calculated from:

∑=

=n

i toti

i

wwx

10

1

and

totii wxw =

Real Adsorbed Solution Theory (gas)

The derivation of the Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory (see earlier) assumed ideal behavior in the adsorbed phase. This assumption resulted in the activity coefficient of each component being set to unity ( 1=iγ ).

Non-ideal behavior in the adsorbed phase can be accounted for by evaluating the activity coefficient using a suitable Gibbs excess enthalpy correlation (for

example, Wilson or UNIQUAC). The binary parameters of the Eg models have to be determined from suitable experiments (Costa et al., 1981). Once those parameters are known, AspenTechs Aspen Properties system is used to supply the value of iγ so that:

( )Π= 0iiii PxPy γ

can be evaluated.

Page 61: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 61

Isotherm Tab (gas): Isotherm Assumed for Layer Aspen Adsim enables you to use a number of pure component isotherms and multi-component isotherms.

In the Isotherm Assumed for Layer box, select from:

• Langmuir Models

• Freundlich Models

• Langmuir-Freundlich Model

• Henry's Models

• Toth Model

• B.E.T. (Brunauer, Emmett & Teller) Models

• B.E.T. Multilayer

• Dubinin-Astakov Model

• Linear Model

• Volmer Model

• Myers Model

• Extended Langmuir Models

• Extended Langmuir- Freundlich Model

• Dual-Site Langmuir Model

• Single Layer B.E.T

• Dual Layer B.E.T

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

• IAS

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Langmuir Models

Langmuir isotherm models typically apply to the adsorption of a single molecule layer on completely homogeneous surfaces, with negligible interaction between adsorbed molecules.

There are three standard sub-options for the pure component Langmuir isotherms supported in Aspen Adsim:

Langmuir 1. The isotherm is a function of a partial pressure or concentration:

i

ii PIP

PIPw

2

1

1+= (partial pressure)

or

i

ii cIP

cIPw

2

1

1+= (concentration)

Page 62: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 62

Langmuir 2. The isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

iTsIPi

TsIP

i PeIPPeIP

w /3

/1

4

2

1+= (partial pressure)

or

iTsIPi

TsIP

i ceIPceIP

w /3

/1

4

2

1+= (concentration)

Langmuir 3. The isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration. Unlike Langmuir2, the maximum loading, expressed by ( )sTIPIP 21 − , is a function of temperature, so reflects more

accurately the physical reality of numerous adsorption processes:

( )i

TIPi

TIPs

i PeIPPeIPTIPIP

ws

s

/3

/321

4

4

1+−

= (partial pressure)

or

( )i

TIPi

TIPs

i ceIPceIPTIPIP

ws

s

/3

/321

4

4

1+−

= (concentration)

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Freundlich Models

Aspen Adsim has two sub-options for the pure component Freundlich isotherms:

Freundlich 1. The isotherm is a function of partial pressure or concentration:

21

IPii PIPw = (partial pressure)

or

21

IPii CIPw = (concentration)

Freundlich 2. The isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

23 /1

IPi

TIPi PeIPw s= (partial pressure)

or

23 /1

IPi

TIPi ceIPw s= (concentration)

Page 63: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 63

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Langmuir-Freundlich Model

This isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

s

s

TIPIPi

TIPIPi

i ePIPePIPIPw /

5

/21

63

43

1+= (partial pressure)

or

s

s

TIPIPi

TIPIPi

i ecIPecIPIP

w /5

/21

63

43

1+= (concentration)

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Henry's Models

Aspen Adsim has two sub-options of the pure component Henry's isotherms:

Henry 1. The isotherm is a function of partial pressure or concentration:

ii PIPw 1= (partial pressure)

or

ii cIPw 1= (concentration)

Henry 2. The isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

iTIP

i PeIPw s/1

2= (partial pressure)

or

iTIP

i ceIPw s/1

2= (concentration)

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Toth Model

The isotherm is a function of partial pressure or concentration:

2

1

2

2

)(1)(

3

1IP

IPi

IPi

i PIPPIP

w

+= (partial pressure)

or

2

1

2

2

)(1)(

3

1IP

IPi

IPi

i cIPcIP

w

+= (concentration)

Page 64: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 64

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): B.E.T

Use the B.E.T. (Brunauer, Emmett and Teller) type isotherm (or multilayer Langmuir relation) for gas-solid systems in which condensation is approached, and hence the number of adsorbed layers is extremely large.

This isotherm is a function of temperature and one of partial pressure or concentration:

+

=

si

si

si

i

TIP

PIPTIPPIP

TIPPIP

w6

54

3

21

exp1exp1

exp (partial pressure)

or

+

=

si

si

si

i

TIP

cIPTIPcIP

TIPcIP

w6

54

3

21

exp1exp1

exp (concentration)

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): BET Multilayer

The BET Multilayer isotherm is similar to the BET isotherm, but has an additional parameter, 4IP , stating the number of layers adsorbed. Physically, it fills the gap between the Langmuir isotherm (single layer BET) and the BET isotherm with an infinite number of layers. Use it only for systems where the operating temperature is below the critical temperature of the adsorbate.

The isotherm is always evaluated as a function of the relative pressure:

sat

ii P

P=φ

If you selected concentration dependency, the following equation is used to calculate the partial pressure:

gii RTcP =

The saturation pressure satP is calculated according to a base 10 Antoine

equation, using degrees Celsius or Kelvin as temperature units of measurement. The parameter 8IP is then a conversion factor for calculating

satP in bar.

sTIPIP

IP

sat IPP +−

×= 7

65

108

Page 65: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 65

The kinetic factor b is:

=

sTIP

IPb 32 exp

The isotherm is:

( )( )

−−+

++−

= +14414

44

1111

1 IP

IPIP

i bbIPIPbIPw

φφφφ

φφ

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Dubinin-Astakov Model

This isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

[ ] [ ]243

221 )/(exp )/(exp IPAAIPIPAAIPwi −+−=

Where:

=

sat

is P

PRTAA ln (partial pressure)

or

=

sat

sis P

RTcRTAA ln (concentration)

and

= 7

65

108IPTIPIP

satsIPP

IP8 is a conversion factor to convert the resulting partial pressure predicted by the Log10 base Antoine Equation, into bar (Aspen Adsim's base unit of measurement for pressure).

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Linear Model

This isotherm is a function of partial pressure or concentration:

21 IPPIPw ii += (partial pressure)

or

21 IPcIPw ii += (concentration)

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Volmer Model

The Volmer isotherm expresses concentration as a function of loading:

−−

=i

i

i

ii wIPIP

wIPwIPIP

wIPc

12

1

12

1 exp

Page 66: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 66

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Myers Model

TheMyers isotherm expresses concentration as a function of loading:

=

121 expIPw

IPIPc ii

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Extended Langmuir Models

There are three standard sub-options of the extended Langmuir isotherms supported in Aspen Adsim:

Extended Langmuir 1. This isotherm is a function of partial pressure or concentration:

( )∑+=

kkk

iii PIP

PIPw

2

1

1 (partial pressure)

or

( )∑+=

kkk

iii cIP

cIPw

2

1

1 (concentration)

Extended Langmuir 2. This isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

( )∑+=

kk

TIPk

iTIP

ii PeIP

PeIPw

sk

si

/3

/1

4

2

1 (partial pressure)

or

( )∑+=

kk

TIPk

iTIP

ii ceIP

ceIPw

sk

si

/3

/1

4

2

1 (concentration)

Extended Langmuir 3. This isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

( )∑+−

=

kk

TIPk

iTIP

isiii PeIP

PeIPTIPIPw

sk

si

/3

/3214

4

1)(

(partial pressure)

or

( )∑+−

=

kk

TIPk

iTIP

isiii ceIP

ceIPTIPIPw

sk

si

/3

/3214

4

1)(

(concentration)

Page 67: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 67

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Extended Langmuir-Freundlich Model

This isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

( )∑+=

k

TIPIPkk

TIPIPiii

i skk

sii

ePIPePIPIP

w /5

/21

43

43

1 (partial pressure)

or

( )∑+=

k

TIPIPkk

TIPIPiii

i skk

sii

ecIPecIPIP

w /5

/21

43

43

1 (concentration)

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Dual-Site Langmuir Model

This isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

∑∑ ++

+=

kk

TIPk

iTIP

i

kk

TIPk

iTIP

ii PeIP

PeIPPeIP

PeIPWsk

si

sk

si

)(1)(1 /7

/ 5

/3

/1

8

6

4

2

(partial pressure)

or

∑∑ ++

+=

kk

TIPk

iTIP

i

kk

TIPk

iTIP

ii ceIP

ceIPceIP

ceIPWkk

si

sk

si

)(1)(1 /7

/ 5

/3

/1

8

6

4

2

(concentration)

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Single Layer B.E.T.

This isotherm is an extended B.E.T isotherm with a monolayer. It is equivalent to the extended Langmuir isotherm. The isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

( )∑+=

k

TIPkk

TIPiii

i sk

si

ePIPePIPIPw /

2

/21

3

3

1 (partial pressure)

or

( )∑+=

k

TIPkk

TIPiii

i sk

si

ecIPecIPIPw /

2

/21

3

3

1 (concentration)

Page 68: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 68

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): Dual Layer B.E.T.

This isotherm is a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration:

( )( )

( ) ( )

+

+

++

=

∑∑

∑∑

k

TIPkkk

k

TIPkk

k

TIPkki

TIPi

k

TIPkk

TIPiii

isksk

sksi

sk

si

ePIPIPePIP

ePIPIPeIP

ePIPePIPIPw

/24

/2

/24

/2

/2

/21

33

33

3

3

111

(partial pressure)

or

( )( )

( ) ( )

+

+

++

=

∑∑

∑∑

k

TIPkkk

k

TIPkk

k

TIPkki

TIPi

k

TkIPkk

TIPiii

isksk

sksi

s

si

ecIPIPecIP

ecIPIPeIP

ecIPecIPIPw

/24

/2

/24

/2

/2

/21

33

33

3

3

111

(concentration)

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): User Procedure

You can supply your own proprietary isotherm relationships using a Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces through either the procedure pUser_g_Isotherm_P (partial pressure dependent isotherm) or pUser_g_Isotherm_C (concentration dependent isotherm).

The functional relationship is:

( )IPyyPTfw nceqi ,...,, 1= (partial pressure)

or

( )IPccTfw nceqi ,..., 1= (concentration)

You can also supply pure component user-specified isotherms, for use as multi-component isotherms, using the IAS method. Here, you must supply two Fortran subroutines:

• The first subroutine is interfaced by the procedure pUser_g_Isotherm_Poi.

This procedure relates the fictitious pure component partial pressure 0iP

(resulting in the same spread pressure as the mixture at pressure P), to

the loading 0iw by means of a pure component isotherm:

( )IPPTfw ieqi ,, 00 =

• The second subroutine integrates the Gibbs isotherm to give the spread pressure. It is interfaced by the procedure pUser_g_Gibbs. The relationship to be evaluated is:

( ) ( )∫==

0

0

00 ,,

,,iP

eqi

i dPPIPPTf

gIPPTgRTA withΠ

Page 69: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 69

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): User Submodel

You can supply your own proprietary isotherm relationships using one of these two submodels:

• gUserIsothermPp (partial pressure dependent isotherm)

• gUserIsothermC (concentration dependent isotherm)

The functional relationship is:

( )IPyyPTfw nceqi ,...,, 1= (partial pressure)

or

( )IPccTfw nceqi ,..., 1= (concentration)

Pure component user specified isotherms may be supplied and used as multi-component isotherms using the IAS method, in which case you must supply two submodels:

• The first submodel is gUserIsothermPoi. This relates the fictious pure

component partial pressure 0iP (resulting in the same spread pressure as

the mixture at pressure P), to the loading 0iw by means of a pure

component isotherm:

( )IPPTfw ieqi ,, 00 =

• The second submodel is gUserGibbs. This integrates the Gibbs isotherm to give the spread pressure. The relationship to be evaluated is:

( ) ( )∫==

0

0

00 ,,

,,iP

eqi

i dPPIPPTf

gIPPTgRTA withΠ

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (gas): IAS

The IAS facility in Aspen Adsim lets you calculate competitive, multicomponent adsorption behavior using pure component isotherms.

Each pure component isotherm has the same expression as its pure component version. Aspen Adsim's standard pure component isotherms available with IAS are:

• Langmuir models

• Freundlich models

• Langmuir-Freundlich models

• Henry's models

• BET multilayer

• User-specified isotherms (user procedure or user submodel)

Page 70: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 70

Isotherm Tab (gas): Adsorbed Solution Theory If you choose an IAS isotherm, you can then use either the ideal adsorbed solution theory (IAS) or the real adsorbed solution theory (RAST). The two options are:

• IAS

• RAST

With RAST selected and with user procedures supplying the physical properties, you must write a Fortran procedure to supply the activity coefficients. The procedure is described by the type pUser_Act_Coeff. The procedure evaluates iγ as a function of temperature, pressure and the

composition of the adsorbed phase:

( )nci xxpTf ,...,,, 1=γ

Isotherm Tab (gas): Isotherm Dependency In the isotherm dependency box, choose from:

• Concentration The adsorption isotherm model is a function of concentration.

• Partial Pressure The adsorption isotherm model is a function of partial pressure.

Energy Balance Tab (gas) Use the Energy Balance tab to specify how the energy balance is incorporated into the model for your gas adsorption process.

Energy Balance Tab (gas): Energy Balance Assumption In the Energy Balance Assumption box, choose your prefered type of energy balance, from:

• Isothermal

• Non-Isothermal with No Conduction

• Non-Isothermal with Gas Conduction

• Non-Isothermal with Solid Conduction

• Non-Isothermal with Gas and Solid Conduction

• None

For a vertical bed type with 2-D spatial dimension, the conduction options are not available as conduction is automatically considered for all dimensions.

Page 71: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 71

Energy Balance Assumption (gas): Isothermal

The Isothermal option completely ignores the energy balance. The gas temperature gT and the solid temperature sT are held constant and equal.

Energy Balance Assumption (gas): Non-Isothermal with No Conduction

This option ignores the axial thermal conduction for the gas and solid phases.

Energy Balance Assumption (gas): Non-Isothermal with Gas Conduction

This option includes the thermal conduction (axial thermal dispersion) term in the gas energy balance:

2

2

zT

k g

gzi ∂∂

ε−

You need to define the form of the gas thermal conductivity.

Energy Balance Assumption (gas): Non-Isothermal with Solid Conduction

This option includes the thermal conduction term in the solid energy balance:

2

2

zTk s

sz ∂∂

You must supply a value for szk in the Specify table for the layer.

Energy Balance Assumption (gas): Non-Isothermal with Gas and Solid Conduction

This option includes the thermal conduction term for both gas and solid phases. You must define the form of the gas thermal conductivity. See Energy Balance Tab: Form of Gas Thermal Conductivity, later.

Energy Balance Tab (gas): Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase Aspen Adsim models also let you include the enthalpy content of the adsorbed phase in the solid-phase energy balance. The Enthalpy of Adsorbed Phase term is optional.

If the enthalpy content of the adsorbed phase is significant for your process, choose this option to include it in the solid phase energy balance. The term for each component is a function of the loading and the temperature in the solid phase, the adsorbed phase heat capacity, and the solid density:

tT

wCH sipaisi ∂∂

ρ=

Page 72: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 72

The total contribution is the sum for all components: ( )Hii

This equation is quite rigorous, despite neglecting some second order terms such as enthalpy of mixing.

In the Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase box, choose from:

• None

• Constant

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase(gas): None

If you choose this option, the enthalpy of adsorbed phase term is ignored in the solid phase energy balance.

Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase(gas): Constant

Here, the heat capacities of the adsorbed phase components paiC are

constant.

Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase(gas): User Procedure

With this option, the heat capacities of the adsorbed phase components paiC

are calculated using a user-defined subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces through the procedure pUser_g_Cpa.

Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase(gas): User Submodel

The heat capacities of the adsorbed phase components paiC are calculated

through the user-defined submodel gUserCpa.

Energy Balance Tab (gas): Heat of Adsorption Assumption You must include the heat of adsorption in the solid-phase energy balance if it is significant for the process. The rate of heat generation by adsorption of each component i per unit mass of solid, depends on the local rate of mass transfer (the change in the amount of material adsorbed):

iHtw

HT ii ∆

∂∂

=

These rates are held in vectors, HT, and summed for all components to obtain the total rate of heat generation by adsorption per unit volume of solid:

∑ −i

iHTs )(ρ

Page 73: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 73

In the Heat of Adsorption Assumption box, choose from:

• None

• Constant

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Heat of Adsorption Assumption (gas): None

The heat generation by adsorption term is omitted from the energy balance.

Heat of Adsorption Assumption (gas): Constant

With this option, the heat of adsorption is constant for each component i. Choose it to set the heat of adsorption to constant values, which you supply in the Specify table for the layer for each component.

Heat of Adsorption Assumption (gas): User Procedure

Here, the heat of adsorption is given by the Fortran procedure pUser_g_DH. You can vary the heat of adsorption and make it a function of, for example, local loading, temperature, and pressure. In general terms:

),,( ijjsjij wPTfH =∆

Where i designates the component and j designates the node.

Heat of Adsorption Assumption (gas): User Submodel

With this option, the heat of adsorption comes from the submodel gUserDH. You can vary the heat of adsorption and make it a function of, for example, local loading, temperature, and pressure. In general terms:

),,( ijjsjij wPTfH =∆

Where i designates the component and j designates the node.

Energy Balance Tab (gas): Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient If you specify a non-isothermal energy balance, Aspen Adsim generates the solid and gas-phase energy balances with a film resistance to the heat transfer between the solid and the gas. Heat transfer is assumed to occur between the two phases according to the film resistance model:

)( bed of mper ferredheat trans of rate 3sgp TTaHTC −=

If there is no such heat transfer resistance, the gas and solid temperatures are equal (lumped):

sjgj TT = for all nodes j = 1, m

To get this condition, set the heat transfer coefficient to a large value (such as 1).

Page 74: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 74

In the Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient box, choose from:

• Constant

• Estimated

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient (gas): Constant

Choose this option to make the heat transfer coefficient a constant value, which you set through the variable HTC in the Specify table for the layer.

Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient (gas): Estimated

The heat transfer coefficient is estimated as follows:

1 Calculate the Reynolds number:

µρ ggp vMr

Re2

=

If the calculated value falls below 1E-10, it is reset to this value.

2 Calculate the Prandl number:

MkC

Prg

pgµ=

If the calculated value falls below 1E-10, it is reset to this value.

3 Calculate the j-factor:

If Re < 190 then 51.066.1 −= Rej otherwise 41.0983.0 −= Rej

4 Calculate the heat transfer coefficient:

32

Pr−= ggpgvCjHTC ρ

If the calculated value falls below 1E-10, it is reset to a value of 1.

Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient (gas): User Procedure

With this option, the user procedure pUser_g_HTC relates the local heat transfer coefficient to the state of the bed at a particular point in the bed. This means you can interface your own Fortran code to calculate the coefficients. Note that the heat transfer coefficient becomes a distributed variable when you select this option. The values are held in the variables HTC(1), HTC(2)HTC(n).

In general terms:

),,,( gjjjgjj vcPTfHTC =

Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient (gas): User Submodel

Here, the local heat transfer coefficient is defined through the user submodel gUserHTC, using the same dependencies as in the User Procedure option.

Page 75: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 75

Energy Balance Tab (gas): Form of Gas Thermal Conductivity If you selected non-isothermal with gas and/or solid conduction, you need to choose the form of gas thermal conductivity.

In the Form of Gas Thermal Conductivity box, choose from:

• Constant

• Based on Axial Dispersion

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Form of Gas Thermal Conductivity (gas): Constant

The thermal conductivity gk has a constant value, which you set in the layer

Specify form.

Form of Gas Thermal Conductivity (gas): Based on Axial Dispersion

This option assumes that the analogy between heat transfer and mass transfer is valid. The effective thermal conductivity coefficient is calculated as the product of the heat capacity of the gas, the axial dispersion coefficient, and the density of the gas:

gzk = (Heat capacity) x (Averaged Axial dispersion coefficient) x

(Molar density)

( ) gk

kzkpggz yECk ρ∑=

Form of Gas Thermal Conductivity (gas): User Procedure

The thermal conductivity varies axially along the bed. If you supply the necessary physical properties directly, Aspen Adsim interfaces a Fortran subroutine through the procedure pUser_g_Kg. If the physical properties come from a package such as PROPERTIES PLUS, Aspen Adsim handles the required calls automatically.

Form of Gas Thermal Conductivity (gas): User Submodel

The thermal conductivity varies axially along the bed and is defined in the user submodel gUserKg.

Page 76: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 76

Energy Balance Tab (gas): Heat Transfer to Environment In the Heat Transfer to Environment box, choose from:

• Adiabatic

• Thin Wall

• Rigorous Model

Heat Transfer to Environment (gas): Adiabatic

No heat transfer occurs between the bed and the wall.

Heat Transfer to Environment (gas): Thin Wall

With this option, the heat exchange between the gas in the bed and the environment is included in the gas phase energy balance as:

)(4ambg

B

w TTDH

The conductivity along the wall and the heat accumulation in the wall are neglected. wH combines the heat transfer resistances of:

• Boundary layer between gas and wall, on the inside of the column.

• Material of the column wall, including insulation material.

• Boundary layer between the outer column wall and the surroundings.

The following equation (Bird et al., 1960) calculates wH for the column cross

section shown in the Heat Transfer to Environment figure (on the next page).

1

2

1

1

11

2

1lnln

2

12

+

+

+

=

woo

o

i

wii

iw

HDkD

D

kD

D

HDDH

Page 77: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 77

Tg

Tamb

Hwi Hwok1 k2

DiD1Do

Page 78: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 78

Heat Transfer to Environment (gas): Rigorous Model

This option includes a wall energy balance equation that contains the following terms:

• Heat transfer from the gas in the bed to the inner wall.

• Heat transfer from the outer wall to the environment (including the influence of any insulating material).

• Axial thermal conduction along the wall.

• Heat accumulation within the wall material.

The wall is assumed to be thin and conductive enough for the inner and outer wall temperatures to be equal. The adiabatic option, that is, ignoring the wall energy balance, is valid only when the wall is extremely thin and non-conductive.

Energy Balance Tab (gas): Form of Gas-Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient There are two options available for the definition of the gas-wall heat transfer coefficient wH :

• Constant

• Estimated

Form of Gas-Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient (gas): Constant

In the Specify table for the layer, set the heat transfer coefficient wH to be a

fixed variable.

Form of Gas-Wall Heat Transfer Coefficient (gas): Estimated

With this option, the gas-wall heat transfer coefficient is calculated from the local conditions inside the adsorbent layer. The correlation uses results from a graphical representation given by Kast, 1988:

( ) 11.220477.01021 26 ++×−=

+ −

HHHB

Bspherew PePe

PeDHC

Nu

where:

sphereC = 12 for a packed bed of spheres

g

charww k

xHNu = = Nusselt number for gas-wall heat transfer

g

pgggcharH k

MCvxPe

ρ= = Gas wall heat transfer Peclet number

charx = 1.15(2 pr ) = Characteristic length for a sphere

Page 79: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 79

Reaction Tab (gas) Use the Reaction tab to generate a layer model that combines adsorption with reaction (heterogeneous and/or homogeneous).

The mass and energy balances must include the reaction terms as well as the mass and heat transfer rates caused by adsorption. Furthermore, the formation of additional solid phases, such as coke, must be accounted for.

About Gas Adsorption with Reaction Processes Adsorptive reactors combine, into a single process unit, the unit operations of heterogeneous and/or homogeneous chemical reaction and adsorption. Such a hybrid process gives benefits over conventional catalytic reactors:

• Higher conversions, for example, when the product in an equilibrium reaction is removed by adsorption from the gas phase. An example of higher conversion is the catalytic dehydrogenation of methyl-cyclohexane to produce toluene. Adsorption of toluene greatly enhances the conversion.

• Higher selectivity, when the desired product of an equilibrium reaction scheme is adsorbed.

Adsorptive reactors are also used in a number of gas purification processes:

• Removing sulfur compounds from gases by first contacting them with α or γ-ferric oxide monohydrates (Iron Sponge) to adsorb sulfur in the form of ferric sulfide, then periodically reoxidizing the surface to form elemental sulfur and to refresh the ferric oxides.

• Removing mercury from natural gas streams by treatment in an ex-situ TSA regenerative process. The process uses an activated carbon adsorbent that contains sulfur, and which allows the formation of mercuric sulfide.

Adsorptive reactors are also useful in air purification processes. Careful selection of the adsorbent may allow one impurity to be adsorbed onto the adsorbent surface, while another impurity reacts on it. For example, modified activated carbon is used as an adsorbent for sulfur dioxide and a catalyst for NOx reduction.

An important application of adsorptive reactors is the separation of radioactive wastes. Such applications usually require extremely high degrees of purification because of the high toxicity of many radioactive elements. Nuclear power plants generate radioactive xenon and krypton as products of the fission reactions, and these can leak out in small quantities into the coolant, to be released to the atmosphere with other gases. To prevent such release, off gases are treated in charcoal delay systems, which prevent the release of xenon and krypton until sufficient time has elapsed for the short-lived radioactivity to decay. Similarly, radioactive iodine from nuclear fuel reprocessing may be captured by chemisorption on molecular sieve zeolites containing silver.

Page 80: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 80

Reaction Tab (gas): Reactions Present In the Reactions Present box, choose a reaction type from:

• None

• Homogeneous

• Heterogeneous

• Homogeneous and Heterogeneous

Reactions Present (gas): None

No reactions are present in the gas or solid phases.

Reactions Present (gas): Homogeneous

Reactions are present in the gas phase only.

Reactions Present (gas): Heterogeneous

Reactions are heterogeneously catalyzed by a solid. The catalyst and adsorbent are assumed to be different, giving rise to two distinct solid phases. Solid reaction participants can be considered.

Reactions Present (gas): Homogeneous and Heterogeneous

Reactions are present in both the gas phase and the solid phase.

Reaction Tab (gas): Homogeneous Rate Dependency In the Homogeneous Rate Dependency box, select the type of expression for homogeneous reaction rate. Choose from these options:

• Homogenous Rate Dependency: Partial Pressure

• Homogenous Rate Dependency: Concentration

Homogeneous Rate Dependency (gas): Partial Pressure

The reaction rate for components in the gas phase is related to the partial pressure of the component and gas phase temperature through the procedure pUser_g_Gas_Rx_Rate_Pp, which requires the user to supply the appropriate Fortran subroutine.

Homogeneous Rate Dependency (gas): Concentration

The reaction rate for components in the gas phase is related to the concentration of the component and gas phase temperature through the procedure pUser_g_Gas_Rx_Rate_C, which requires the user to supply the appropriate Fortran subroutine.

Page 81: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 81

Reaction Tab (gas): Number of Homogeneous Reactions In the Number of Homogeneous Reactions box, select the number of reactions that occur in the gas phase.

Reaction Tab (gas): Heterogeneous Rate Dependency In the Heterogeneous Rate Dependency box, select the type of expression for heterogeneous reaction rate. Choose from:

• Partial Pressure

• Concentration

Heterogeneous Rate Dependency (gas): Partial Pressure

With this option, the reaction rate for components on the surface of the catalytic adsorbent is related to the gas phase partial pressure of the component and gas phase temperature, through one of these procedures:

• pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_Pp

• pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_Pp_Sol (for when solid reactants are present)

Both procedures require you to supply the appropriate Fortran subroutine.

Heterogeneous Rate Dependency (gas): Concentration

With this option, the reaction rate for components on the surface of the catalytic adsorbent is related to the concentration of the component and gas phase temperature through one of these procedures:

• pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_C

• pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_C_Sol (for when solid reactants are present)

Both procedures require you to supply the appropriate Fortran subroutine.

Reaction Tab (gas): Number of Heterogeneous Reactions In the Number of Heterogeneous Reactions box, select the number of reactions that occur on the surface of the catalytic adsorbent.

Page 82: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 82

Reaction Tab (gas): Are Solid Reactants Present This option is active only if heterogeneous reactions are present. Choose from:

Yes. Here, solid reaction participants are present. The solids are formed either by the reaction (for example carbon in reaction networks that suffer from coking), or they represent catalytically active sites being deactivated or reactivated. You define, through Fortran subroutines, the way solid components interact with the gas phase. Aspen Adsim interfaces these subroutines through one of these two procedures:

• pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_Pp

- or -

• pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_Pp_Sol

No. Here, no solid reactants are present.

Reaction Tab (gas): Solid Reactant List In the Solid Reactant List box, choose a default list or a user-defined list of solid reactants.

Procedures Tab (gas) Use the Procedures tab to view a list of the user procedures in use within the current adsorption layer model.

Gas Adsorption: Summary of Mass and Energy Balance Equations This section summarizes the equations for mass and energy balances used for gas adsorption processes in Aspen Adsim.

Page 83: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 83

Gas Adsorption: Mass Balance for Gas Phase The overall mass balance for a multi-component gas phase accounts for the convection of material and mass transfer, from the gas to the solid phase. Aspen Adsim uses this equation only for constant pressure systems, and it is suitable only for simulating breakthrough curves at constant pressure and temperature.

The governing partial differential equation is:

( )0=∑+

tw

zv k

ks

gg

∂∂

ρ∂

ρ∂

For an explanation of the symbols used, see Explanation of Equation Symbols, later.

Each component in the gas phase is governed by a similar equation, with extra terms for accumulation, and for axial and radial dispersion terms (if required):

( )0 + 1

2

2

=++

∂∂

∂∂

−− kk

Bkgk

rkik

zki Jtc

zcv

rc

rrr

Ezc

E∂

∂ε

∂∂

ε∂

∂ε

In general, axial and radial dispersion needs to be considered, but the dispersion coefficient can be difficult to measure. Aspen Adsim sets the dispersion coefficient either to a constant value, or calculates it as a function of local conditions (that is, a distributed parameter).

Gas Adsorption: Mass Balance for Additional Solid Phase The concentration of each solid component i is calculated from its formation rate:

0,, =−

∂isol

isol Rtc

Page 84: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 84

Gas Adsorption: Gas Phase Energy Balance The gas phase energy balance includes terms for:

• Thermal conduction

• Convection of energy, accumulation of heat

• Compression

• Heat transfer from gas to solid

• Heat transfer from gas to the internal wall

• Heat of reaction.

The governing partial differential equation is:

( ) ( ) 04

+

,,

2

2

=+++−+−+

++−

HxHxg

catpcatsrogB

wsgp

gggvgB

gggvg

giga

QatT

CHTTDHTTHTCa

zv

PtT

CzT

vCzT

k

∂∂

ρ

∂∂

∂∂

ρε∂∂

ρ∂

∂ε

The above equation is in its most complete form, including axial thermal conduction, heat transfer to the environment, and the effect of heterogeneous and homogenous chemical reactions. The only term missing is the radial thermal conduction term, which is included for 2-dimensional, vertical beds. However, in this geometry, heat transfer to the environment is a boundary condition so is not part of the energy balance (it is in the 1-dimensional case).

Gas Adsorption: Solid Phase Energy Balance The solid phase energy balance includes terms for:

• Thermal conduction

• Accumulation of heat

• Accumulation of enthalpy in the adsorbed phase

• Heat of adsorption

• Gas-solid heat transfer from gas to solid (expressed in terms of a film resistance, where the heat transfer area is proportional to the area of the adsorbent particles)

The solid phase energy balance is:

( )∑

=

=

=−−

+

++

∂∂

∂∂

−−

n

isgp

iis

sn

iipais

spss

ssr

ssa

TTHTCatwH

tTwC

tTC

rT

rrrk

zTk

1

12

2

0

)(11

∂∂∆ρ

∂∂ρ

∂∂ρ

∂∂

Page 85: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 85

Gas Adsorption: Wall Energy Balance The wall energy balance includes terms for:

• Axial thermal conduction along the wall

• Heat accumulation within the wall material

• Heat transfer from the bed to the inner wall

• Heat transfer from the outer wall to the environment

The governing equation is:

( )( ) ( )

( )( ) 0

4422

2

222

2

=−−+

++−

−+−+− ambw

BTB

TBambwg

BTB

Bw

wpww

ww TT

DWDWD

HTTDWD

DH

tT

czT

k∂

∂ρ

∂∂

For a 2-dimensional bed model, Aspen Adsim replaces the third term with the sum of the conductive energy fluxes in the radial direction, which come from the solid phase energy balances. These fluxes are the boundary conditions for 2-dimensional bed models.

Gas Adsorption: Summary of Factors that affect the Mass Balance Equations This section lists the factors that affect the mass balance in the solid and gas phases.

Gas Adsorption: Axial Dispersion Term

The axial dispersion term is:

2

2

zc

E kzki ∂

∂ε−

Gas Adsorption: Radial Dispersion Term

This term is only active if you chose vertical bed and two-dimensional spatial discretization:

∂∂

∂∂

−rc

rrr

E krki

Gas Adsorption: Convection Term

The convection term is:

( )zcv kg

∂∂

Gas Adsorption: Gas Phase Accumulation Term

The accumulation term is:

tck

B ∂∂ε

Page 86: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 86

Gas Adsorption: Rate of Flux to Solid Surface

The rate of flux to the solid surface is given by:

JwtS= −ρ

∂∂

Gas Adsorption: Rate of Adsorption

The rate of adsorption is represented as an accumulation term in the gas phase mass balance. The linear driving force solid-film model is:

( )s

kadskkk

k JwwMTCs

tw

ρ∂∂ ,* =−=

There are analogous expressions for gas films and quadratic driving forces. If

a particle material balance was considered, twk∂

∂ is taken to be the integral

uptake of the particle as determined by the flux through the boundary layer. (See Also Particle MB.)

Note: Procedure-defined expressions need adjusting accordingly.

Gas Adsorption: Reaction Term

The reaction term accounts for the removal or formation of components in the gas phase, due to reaction on the solid catalyst's surface. It is represented as:

kreacgasikreaccat JJ ,,,, ε+

Where:

kreaccatJ ,, = rate of consumption or production of k by

heterogeneous (catalytic) reactions

kreacgasJ ,, = rate of consumption or production of k by homogeneous

(gas phase) reactions.

jgaskjgas

reacgasn

jkreacgas RJ ,,,

1,, ν∑

=

−=

jcatkjcat

reaccatn

jcatskreaccat RJ ,,,

1,,, νρ ∑

=

−=

Page 87: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 87

You must define the rates of reaction in a user procedure, as a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or component concentration. The total rate of flux to the surface per unit volume is then:

kreacgasikreaccatkadsk JJJJ ,,,,, ε++=

kreacgasikreaccatk

sk JJtw

J ,,,, ε∂

∂ρ ++=

Gas Adsorption: Defining the Mass Balance for Additional Solid Phases During the catalytic reaction, solid phases such as coke deposit sometimes form, or a metal oxide catalyst is oxidized and/or reduced. The concentration of each solid component i is calculated from its rate of formation:

0,, =−

∂isol

isol Rtc

You must define the reaction rate of the solid components in a Fortran subroutine, as a function of temperature, pressure, and solid component concentrations. Aspen Adsim interfaces this subroutine through the procedure pUser_g_Cat_RX_Rate_Pp_Sol.

Gas Adsorption: Summary of Factors that affect the Energy Balance This section lists the factors that affect the energy balance equations in the:

• Gas phase energy balance.

• Solid phase energy balance.

• Wall energy balance.

Gas Adsorption: Defining the Energy Balance in the Gas Phase This section lists the factors that affect the energy balance equations in the gas phase.

Gas Adsorption: Effect of Compression

The reversible rate of internal energy increase per unit volume by compression is:

zv

P g

Page 88: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 88

Gas Adsorption: Convective Term

The gas convective term is always included in the gas phase energy balance:

zT

vC gggvg ∂

∂ρ

Gas Adsorption: Accumulation in Gas Phase

The enthalpy accumulation in the gas phase is represented as:

tT

C ggvgi ∂

∂ρε

Gas Adsorption: Axial Thermal Conduction in Gas Phase

The axial gas thermal conduction (axial thermal dispersion) term is given by:

2

2

zT

k ggzi ∂

∂− ε

Where gzk is evaluated based on your choices in:

• Energy Balance tab for 1-dimesional models.

• Material/Momentum Balance tab for two dimensional models.

Gas Adsorption: Radial Thermal Conduction in Gas Phase

The radial gas thermal conduction term (radial thermal dispersion) is represented as:

∂∂

−rT

rrr

k ggri

Where grk is evaluated according to the options selected in the material and

momentum balance tab for two-dimensional models.

Gas Adsorption: Gas-Solid Heat Transfer

Aspen Adsim uses a film resistance model to represent heat transfer between gases and solids:

Rate of heat transferred per unit volume = )( sgp TTHTCa −

with:

( )p

ip ra 31 ε−=

This is for adsorption only. You set pa for adsorption and reaction.

Page 89: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 89

Gas Adsorption: Heat Exchange between Gas and Internal Wall

For one-dimensional vertical and horizontal bed models:

)(4 og

B

w TTDH

Where:

ambo TT = for adiabatic/thin walls and

wo TT = for thick walls

For other geometries, this term is missing because:

• Radial bed models are always considered to be adiabatic.

• For two dimensional vertical bed models, the heat transfer to the column wall is one of the thermal boundary conditions for the radial direction.

Gas Adsorption: Rate of Heat Generation by Reaction

The rate of heat generation by reaction is the sum of the contributions from individual reactions:

∑∑==

+=catnreac

llcatlRcatcats

gasnreac

kkgaskRgasiR RHRHH

,

1,,,

,

1,, ρε

Where:

k = index for the set of homogenous reactions

l = index for the set of heterogeneous reactions

lRcatkRgas HH ,, , = molar heats of reactions k and l, typically in MJ/kmol

kgasR , = rate of homogenous reaction k, typically in kmol/(m3 s)

lcatR , = rate of heterogeneous reaction l, typically in kmol/(kg s)

cats,ρ = catalyst bulk density

You must define the rates of reaction in a user procedure, as a function of temperature, and one of partial pressure or concentration. The heat of reaction must also be defined as a function of temperature and mole fraction. See the following procedures, described in the Adsim Library Reference guide:

• pUser_g_Cat_RX_Rate_Pp_Sol

• pUser_g_Cat_RX_Rate_C_Sol

• pUser_g_Cat_RX_Rate_Pp

• pUser_g_Cat_RX_Rate_C

• pUser_g_Gas_RX_Rate_Pp

• pUser_g_Gas_RX_Rate_C

• pUser_g_Cat_RX_Heat

• pUser_g_Gas_RX_Heat

Page 90: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 90

Gas Adsorption: Heat Exchange between Gas and Internal Heat Exchanger

The heat exchange between the gas phase and a heat exchanger (either as jacket around the packed bed or via tubes surrounded by adsorbents) is given by:

HxHxQa

Where Hxa is the specific heat exchange area per unit bed volume and HxQ

the energy flux exchanged, given by:

( )HxgHxHx TTUQ −=

for single phase exchange media, and

( ) ( )StgStHxCwgCwHxHx TTUTTUQ −+−= ,,

for two phase exchange media.

See also Configure Form (gas) earlier in this chapter.

Gas Adsorption: Defining the Energy Balance for the Solid Phase This section lists the factors that affect the energy balance equations in the solid phase.

Gas Adsorption: Accumulation in Solid Phase

The solid phase enthalpy accumulation is always included in the solid phase energy balance:

tTC s

pss ∂∂ρ

Gas Adsorption: Axial Thermal Conductivity in Solid Phase

The solid thermal conduction term is:

2

2

zTk s

sz ∂∂

Gas Adsorption: Radial Thermal Conductivity in Solid Phase

This term is active only for vertical beds and two-dimensional spatial discretization:

∂∂

∂∂

−rT

rrr

k ssr

1

Page 91: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 91

Gas Adsorption: Heat of Adsorption

The rate of heat generation by adsorption of each component i, per unit mass of solid, is a function of the local rate of mass transfer:

tw

HHT iii ∂

∂= ∆

These rates are held in vectors iHT and summed for all components to give

the total rate of heat generation by adsorption per unit volume of solid:

( )∑ −i

is HTρ

Gas Adsorption: Heat of Adsorbed Phase

The term for each component is a function of the loading and the temperature in the solid phase:

tT

wCH sipaisi ∂∂

ρ=

The total contribution comes from the sum for all components: ( )∑i

iH

You supply paiC (heat capacity of adsorbed component i) as either a fixed

value for each component, or through a user procedure or submodel. Try these guidelines when deciding what specific heat capacity to use (Tien, 1994):

For cTT << use paiC for liquid

For T just below cT use system knowledge to specify paiC

For cTT > use paiC for compressed gas

Gas Adsorption: Gas-Solid Heat Transfer

The gas-solid heat transfer term is the same as for the gas phase, but with the sign reversed:

)( sgp TTaHTC −

Page 92: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 92

Gas Adsorption: Defining Energy Balance for the Wall This is applicable only if you selected a rigorous model for the heat transfer to the environment.

The following effects are considered:

• Heat exchange between gas and wall.

• Between wall and environment.

• Axial thermal conductivity along wall.

• Heat content of wall.

Gas Adsorption: Heat Exchange between Gas and Wall

When the rigorous wall energy balance is selected, Aspen Adsim includes, in the wall energy balance, the heat exchange between the gas in the bed and the inner surface of the wall.

The term is represented as:

( )( )wg

BTB

Bw TT

DWDDH −

−+ 22

4

Where

BD = Internal diameter of layer

TW = Width of column wall

The supply of wH is defined by the Form of Gas-Wall Heat Transfer

Coefficient option. It is either constant or estimated from a correlation. The heat exchange between gas and wall is also included in the gas phase energy balance. Note that the equation has a slightly different form, since the basis of the equation is per unit volume of gas phase:

( )wgB

w TTDH

−4

Gas Adsorption: Heat Exchange between Wall and Environment

When you include a rigorous wall energy balance, the corresponding term in the wall energy balance gives the heat transfer between the outer wall and the environment:

( )( )

)( D

D 4

22B

Bambw

BT

Tamb TTDWWH

−−+

+

Gas Adsorption: Axial Thermal Conductivity along Wall

The axial thermal conduction along the wall is always part of the wall energy balance. The term is represented as:

Page 93: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 93

2

2

zT

k ww ∂

∂−

You must specify the value of the wall thermal conductivity wk in the Specify

table for the layer.

Gas Adsorption: Heat Content of Wall

The Heat Content of Wall term is always included in the wall energy balance:

tT

C wpww ∂

∂ρ

You must specify the value of the wall density wρ and the specific heat

capacity of the wall pwC in the Specify table for the layer.

Gas Adsorption: Explanation of Equation Symbols

Symbol Explanation Aspen Adsim base units

a Specific particle surface. m2/m3

Hxa Specific heat exchanger surface. m2(HX area)/m3(Bed)

Pa Specific particle surface per unit volume bed.

m2(Particle area)/m3(Bed)

A Area. m2

AA Placeholder variable used for Dubinin-Astakhov isotherm evaluation.

b Kinetic Langmuir factor. 1/bar

bkc Bulk gas phase concentration. kmol/m3

kc Molar concentration of component k. kmol/m3

mskc Macropore gas phase concentration. kmol/m3

solc Concentration of solid phase reactant. kmol/kg

paic Specific heat capacity of adsorbed phase. MJ/kmol/K

catpc , Specific heat capacity of catalyst. MJ/kg/K

pgc Specific gas phase heat capacity at constant pressure.

MJ/kmol/K

psc Specific heat capacity of adsorbent. MJ/kmol/K

pWc Specific heat capacity of column wall. MJ/kg/K

Page 94: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 94

vgc Specific gas phase heat capacity at constant volume.

MJ/kmol/K

BD Bed diameter. m

efcD Effective micropore diffusion coefficient. m2/s

efPD Effective macropore diffusion coefficient. m2/s

ekD Effective adsorbed phase diffusivity of component k.

m2/s

kiD Knudsen diffusion coefficient of component i.

m2/s

mkD Mean molecular diffusion coefficient of component k.

m2/s

kactE , Activation energy for Arrhenius relationship.

MJ/kmol

ikE Radial dispersion coefficient of component k.

m2/s

zkE Axial dispersion coefficient of component k. m2/s

f Function. -

eqf Equilibrium (isotherm) relationship. -

ambH Wall-ambient heat transfer coefficient. MW/m2/K

BH Height of adsorbent layer. m

iH Rate of change of heat of adsorbed phase. MJ/m3/s

RH Combined heats of homogenous and heterogeneous reactions.

MJ/m3 (Bed)/s

RcatH Heat of catalytic reaction. MJ/kmol

RgasH Gas phase heat of reaction. MJ/kmol

TiH Heat of adsorption contribution to solid phase energy balance.

MJ/m3/s

wH Gas-wall heat transfer coefficient. MJ/m2/s

iH∆ Heat of adsorption of component i. MJ/kmol

HTC Gas-solid heat transfer coefficient. MJ/m2/s

IP Isotherm parameter, units depend on isotherm.

j Colburn j-factor for heat or mass transfer. -

kadsJ , Mass transfer rate of component k owing to adsorption.

kmol/m3 (Bed)/s

kreaccatJ ,, Mass transfer rate of component k owing to heterogeneous catalytic reactions.

kmol/m3 (Bed)/s

Page 95: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 95

reacgasJ , Mass transfer rate of component k owing to homogenous, gas phase reactions.

kmol/m3 (Void)/s

kJ Mass transfer rate of component k to/from adsorbent.

kmol/m3 (Bed)/s

kk0 Pre-exponential factor for Arrhenius relationship.

m/s

Pkk0 Pre-exponential factor for pressure dependent Arrhenius relationship.

m/s

fkk Film mass transfer coefficient of component k.

m/s

gk Gas phase thermal conductivity. MW/m/K

grk Effective radial gas phase thermal conductivity.

MW/m/K

dyngrk Dynamic contribution to grk . MW/m/K

statgrk Static contribution to srk . MW/m/K

ik Effective, lumped mass transfer coefficient of component i.

1/s

sk Solid thermal conductivity. MW/m/K

gzk Effective axial gas phase thermal conductivity.

MW/m/K

srk Effective radial solid phase thermal conductivity.

MW/m/K

statsrk Static contribution to grk . MW/m/K

szk Effective axial solid phase thermal conductivity.

MW/m/K

Wk Thermal conductivity of column wall. MW/m/K

KiK Isotherm slope of component i (Henrys coefficient).

m3/kg

KiK Dimensionless isotherm slope of component i (Henrys coefficient).

-

macK Macropore mass transfer coefficient. 1/s

micK Micropore mass transfer coefficient. 1/s

pK Darcys constant. bar s/m2

PiK Macropore diffusion coefficient. m2/s

L Length of horizontal bed. m

M Molecular weight. kg/kmol

gMTC Gas film mass transfer coefficient. 1/s

sMTC Solid film mass transfer coefficient. 1/s

Page 96: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 96

p Emissivity in calculation of effective thermal conductivities.

P Pressure. bar

0iP

IAS vapor pressure. bar

satP Saturation pressure. bar

HxQ Heat transfer rate to internal heat exchanger.

MJ/m2/s

r Radial co-ordinate (in packed bed or particle).

m

cr Microparticle (crystal) radius. m

pr Particle radius. m

R Universal gas constant. bar m3/kmol/K

catR Catalytic reaction rate. kmol/kg/s

gasR Gas phase reaction rate. kmol/m3/s

solR Solid phase reaction rate. kmol/kg/s

t Time. s

cyclet Adsorption cycle time. s

T Temperature. K

0T Equal to ambT or WT , depending on

context used.

K

ambT Ambient temperature. K

cT Critical temperature. K

CWT Cooling water temperature. K

sT Solid phase temperature. K

gT Gas phase temperature. K

HxT Heat exchange medium temperature. K

StT Steam temperature. K

WT Wall temperature. K

Tort Adsorbent tortuosity. -

HxU Overall heat transfer coefficient: gas to heat exchange medium.

MW/m2/K

cwHxU , Overall heat transfer coefficient: gas to cooling water.

MW/m2/K

Page 97: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 97

StHxU , Overall heat transfer coefficient: gas to steam.

MW/m2/K

gv Gas phase superficial velocity. m/s

kw Loading. kmol/kg

0kw

Pure component loading of component k. kmol/kg

W Width of horizontal bed. m

TW Width of column wall. m

charx Characteristic length. m

kx Mole fraction of component k in the adsorbed phase.

-

ky Mole fraction of component k in the gas phase.

-

z Axial co-ordinate. m

Z Gas compressibility factor. -

Symbol Explanation Aspen Adsim base units

rgα Radiation contribution to statgrk .

rsα Radiation contribution to statsrk .

β Factor used in statgrk calculation.

∆r Radial discretization distance. m

Bε Total bed voidage. m3 (Void+Pore)/m3 (Bed)

iε Interparticle voidage. m3 (Void)/m3 (Bed)

Pε Intraparticle voidage. m3 (Pore)/m3 (Particle)

φ Function of packing density, used in statsrk

calculation.

φ Relative pressure: ksatk PP ,/ . -

γ Factor used in statsrk calculation.

iγ Activity coefficient of component i. -

µ Dynamic viscosity. N s/m2

iads ,µ Chemical potential of component i in the adsorbed phase.

MJ/kmol

igas,µ Chemical potential of component i in the gas phase.

MJ/kmol

jkν Stoichiometric coefficient of component k in reaction j.

-

Page 98: Aspen Adsim

1 Gas Adsorption Processes 98

0iΠ

Spreading pressure of component i. bar m

θ Time constant for adsorption cycle. -

gρ Gas phase molar density. kmol/m3

sρ Adsorbent bulk density. kg/m3

cats,ρ Catalyst bulk density. kg/m3

Wρ Wall density. kg/m3

Ω Parameter in Glueckauf expression. -

Ψ Particle shape factor. -

Dimensionless number Defining expression Description

WNu

g

charw

kxH Nusselt number for gas wall heat transfer.

HPe g

pgggchar

kMCvx ρ Gas-wall heat transfer Peclet number.

KPe

z

bg

EHv

Component Peclet number for mass transfer.

Pr

MkC

g

pgµ Prandl number.

kSc MD gmiρ

µ Component Schmidt number.

kSh

mi

pfi

Drk 2

Component Sherwood number.

Re

µρ ggp vMr2 Particle Reynolds number.

Page 99: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 99

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling

Introduction Aspen Adsim 2004.1 presents an innovative new modeling approach to maximize profitability in the design, simulation, and optimization of periodic adsorption processes for gas separation, processes, such as Pressure Swing Adsorption (PSA), Thermal Swing Adsorption (TSA), Vacuum Swing Adsorption (VSA), etc.

Direct determination of the cyclic steady state, without carrying out a dynamic simulation over a large number of cycles, is now available using Aspen Adsim 2004.1.

This powerful tool - Cyclic Steady State (CSS) modeling (the result of complete discretization of both time and space) presents a periodic adsorption process as a steady state problem.

The Aspen Adsim 2004.1 CSS models offer an extremely efficient design tool that can be more readily used as an optimization package to determine optimal design and operating conditions for an adsorption process.

The following sections outline CSS modeling tasks and include instructions on using CSS models for your engineering business:

• What is CSS Modeling?

• Discretization Techniques for Time and Space

• Connectivity Between CSS Models

• Bed Model Details

• Material Balance

• Momentum Balance

• Kinetic Model

• Energy Balance

• Adsorption Equilibrium Models

• User Guidelines

Page 100: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 100

• How to Create a CSS Simulation Flowsheet

• How to Create a Dynamic Simulation Flowsheet using CSS Models

• How to Convert a CSS Flowsheet to a Dynamic Flowsheet

• How to a Convert Dynamic Flowsheet to a CSS Flowsheet • Developers Tips to Get Better Convergence Property in CSS Simulation

What is CSS Modeling? A periodic adsorption process operates on sequential steps (for example, continuously repeated steps of Feed, Purge, Pressure equalization, Blow down, Production, etc.) with multiple adsorbers packed with single or multiple adsorbent layers. Although the operation of each bed is batchwise, the whole system is continuous because of the use of multi-beds that are ultimately operated in a cyclic steady state within a confined cycle time. Cyclic Steady State (CSS), which is the nature of periodic adsorption processes, implies a steady state in which the conditions at the end of each cycle are identical to those at the beginning.

The traditional approach for CSS determination is to carry out a dynamic simulation of the system, beginning with a specified set of initial condition, over a large number of cycles until a CSS is eventually confirmed from a defined criteria, e.g., the cycle initial state at t0 must be identical to the cycle end state at tN, as illustrated in Figure 1.

SpatialDomain Time

Domain

Cycle end state(tN)

Step1Step2

StepN

t1

t2

tN

tN-1

t0

dynamic simulationCycle initial state(t0)

Figure 1 Illustration for traditional dynamic simulation of a periodic adsorption process

Page 101: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 101

t0tN

t1

t2

tN-1

Periodic BoundaryState(tN) = State(t0)

i.e. Cyclic Steady State

Time domain (t)

Spatial domain (x)

Figure 2 Illustration for the concept of CSS modeling system in Aspen Adsim

From a mathematical point of view, the criterion for CSS is considered a unique characteristic of a periodic adsorption process, and has brought ideas to explore a better numerical method toward CSS in terms of cost-effective process simulation. The existence of periodic time boundary inspires to replace the initial condition by a periodicity condition requiring that the system state at the end of each cycle is identical to that at its beginning.

As illustrated in Figure 2, the forced reformulation also constrains the system within a specified time domain length, from the starting point (t0) to the ending point (tN). This suggests a steady state simulation is feasible by complete discretization of space and time within a confined time length (i.e., cycle time).

Based on the above concept, the CSS models in Aspen Adsim 2004.1 have been developed to determine CSS from purely steady state simulation. Direct determination of CSS will effectively save the costs for the optimization of periodic adsorption process since the technique could offer an extremely efficient design tool that can be more readily used as an optimization package to determine optimal design and operating conditions.

Further benefits come from the fact that the graphic user interface of the freshly released CSS models from Aspen Adsim 2004.1 is the same as those of existing Aspen Adsim dynamic models. Therefore, existing Adsim users should find it easy to use this new feature.

The high-level functionalities of CSS bed model (gCSS_Adsorber) in Aspen Adsim 2004.1 are listed in Table 1, compared with the original Aspen Adsim dynamic bed model (gas_bed).

Page 102: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 102

Table 1. Functional comparison of CSS and dynamic bed models in Aspen Adsim 2004.1

Page 103: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 103

Discretization Techniques for Time and Space Spatial derivatives of CSS bed model (gCSS_Adsorber) are discretized by one of the following numerical methods:

• CFD4 4th Order Central Finite Difference, equivalent to CDS2 in gas_bed

• OCFE2 2nd Order Orthogonal Collocation on Finite Elements

• OCFE4 4 th Order Orthogonal Collocation on Finite Elements

Time derivatives of CSS models are explained using 1st Order Backward Finite Difference approximation:

( )t

xtuxtutxtu jnjnjn

∆−

≈∂

∂ − ),(),(, 1

Connectivity between CSS Models CSS models contain at least an input and an output port (gCSS_Port). Each port has associated variables that correspond to the material connection stream (gCSS_Material_Connection) that allows reversible flow.

These are the available connections for CSS models:

Page 104: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 104

Bed Model Details

Material Balance The CSS bed model (gCSS_Adsorber) uses the following material balance for the bulk gas adsorption:

( )02

2

=∂

∂+

∂∂

+∂

∂+

∂∂

−tQ

tC

xCv

xCD i

bi

tigi

bLi ρεε

The physical meanings of each term are:

2

2

xCD i

bLi ∂∂

− ε Axial dispersion contribution1

( )xCv ig

∂ Convection

tCi

t ∂∂ε Gas phase accumulation2

tQi

b ∂∂ρ Adsorbed phase accumulation3

The following continuity equation is required to complete the material balance around the system,:

gi

iC ρ=∑

Notation

iC Gas phase concentration for component i, kmol/m3

LiD Axial dispersion coefficient for component i, m2/s

t Time, s

iQ Amount adsorbed for component i, kmol/kg-adsorbent

gv Superficial gas velocity, m/s

x Axial distance coordinate, m

bε Bed (interparticle) voidage

pε Intraparticle voidage

tε Total voidage

Page 105: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 105

gρ Gas density, kmol/m3

bρ Bed packing density, kg/m3

pρ Particle density (solid density, true density), kg/m3

References 1 If a concentration gradient exists in a packed bed, a diffusive mass flux

will occur. In addition, eddy (turbulent) diffusion due to the flow also contributes to the mass flux. The resultant flux is referred to as mass dispersion, which may be expressed mathematically in terms of Ficks law, where the proportionality constant is called dispersion coefficient. Dispersion occurs in both radial and axial directions in the bed. The axial dispersed mixing often occurs when a fluid flows through a packed bed and may cause unfavorable separation efficiency as the separation factor is becoming smaller. In general, flow through a packed bed may be adequately represented with inclusion of the axial dispersed plug flow consideration.

2 Here, tε is the total bed voidage, which is the combined interparticle and

intraparticle voidages calculated from

( )bpbt εεεε −+= 1 .

3 Here, bρ is the bed (packing) density calculated from ( )bpb ερρ −= 1 .

Momentum Balance Gas flow through a packed bed can be described by a relevant pressure drop correlation. Within the CSS adsorber model (gCSS_Adsorber), one of the following pressure drop correlations may be chosen as the one. Note that there is no other option to assume an ideal flow regime, such as Constant Pressure and Velocity and Constant Pressure with Variable Velocity since the CSS models has been developed fundamentally for cyclic process for gas separation.

(1) Darcys Law:

gpvKxP

−=∂∂

(2) Blake-Kozeny:

( )( ) g

bp

bg vrx

P32

25

2110150

εψεµ −×−

=∂∂ −

Page 106: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 106

(3) Burke-Plummer:

( )( )

23

5

211075.1

gbp

bgw vrM

xP

εψερ −×−

=∂∂ −

(4) Ergun Equation:

( )( )

( )( )

−×+

−×−=

∂∂ −−

23

5

32

25

211075.1

2110150

gbp

bgwg

bp

bg vrM

vrx

Pεψ

ερεψ

εµ

Notation

pK Darcy Coefficient, bar.s/m2

wM Molecular weight of gaseous mixture, kg/kmol

P Gas pressure, bar

pr Particle radius, m

gv Superficial gas velocity, m/s

x Axial distance coordinate, m

bε Bed voidage (void fraction)

gµ Gas mixture viscosity, cP

gρ Gas density, kmol/m3

ψ Particle shape factor

Kinetic Model Rigorous simulation of an adsorption process requires a reliable representation of the adsorption kinetics for the adsorbent used. In adsorption, the mass transfer mechanism consists of four steps:

• Fluid film transfer

• Pore diffusion

• Adhesion on surface

• Surface diffusion

Because the surface adhesion rate approximates the order of the collision frequency of the gas molecule on the solid surface, (which is much greater than for the transport processes) the equilibrium is assumed instantaneously at the interfaces.

Adsorptives initially transfer from the bulk gas phase through an external film to the external surface of the particles. The molecules are diffused into the

Page 107: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 107

pores of the particle, adsorbed on the active sites and then diffused along the surface. While fluid film transfer and pore diffusion are treated as sequential steps, pore diffusion and surface diffusion generally occur in parallel. Any combination of the three steps can constitute the rate-controlling mechanism.

This mechanism definitely depends on the adsorption system and can vary with the operating conditions of the process. Typically, a film adjacent to the surface confines the mass transfer rate between solid and fluid phases and this external film mass transfer resistance may be determined by the hydrodynamic condition. It is in fact more convenient to depict film transfer rate in terms of an effective transfer coefficient or a lumped resistance coefficient rather than to use a diffusion equation to represent adsorption kinetics in a rigorous manner.

The CSS adsorber model (gCSS_Adsorber) within Aspen Adsim 2004.1 limits two types of lumped kinetic models for application. They are: Linear Driving Force Approximation and Quadratic Driving Force Approximation. Both approximations have a lumped resistance coefficient that may be determined at either fluid or solid film where the mass transfer occurs:

(1) Linear Driving Force Approximation (LDFA):

( )*iiF

ib CCktQ

i−=

∂∂ρ at fluid film

( )iiSii QQktQ

−=∂

∂ * at solid film

(2) Quadratic Driving Force Approximation (QDFA):

( ) ( )i

iiFi

ib C

CCktQ

2

2*2 −=

∂∂ρ at fluid film

( ) ( )i

iiSi

i

QQQk

tQ

2

22* −=

∂∂

at solid film

The lumped mass transfer coefficient, Fik or Sik , can be determined by a

constant or by a certain relationship according to the dynamic conditions of adsorption system. The CSS adsorber model (gCSS_Adsorber) provides the following choices in determining the lumped mass transfer coefficient from the empirical assessment by Aspen Adsim users:

• Constant

LDFii kk =

• Arrhenius

−=

s

iii RT

Ekk exp0

Page 108: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 108

• Effective Diffusivity

2

15

p

eii r

Dk = Linear Driving Force Approximation

2

2

p

eii r

Dk π= Quadratic Driving Force Approximation

• Pressure Dependent

Pkk Pi

i =

• Pressure Dependent Arrhenius

−=

s

iPii RT

EPkk exp0

Notation

iC Gas phase concentration for component i, kmol/m3

*iC Equilibrium gas phase concentration for component i, kmol/m3

eiD Effective diffusivity for component i, m2/s

iE Activation energy for component i, MJ/kmol

ik Mass transfer coefficient (fluid or solid) for

component i, 1/s

iLDFk Mass transfer coefficient as a constant for

component i, 1/s

Pik Pressure dependent mass transfer coefficient

for component i, bar/s

ik0 Pre-exponent for component i, 1/s

Pik0 Pre-exponent for component i, bar/s

Fik Fluid film mass transfer coefficient for component i, 1/s

Sik Solid film mass transfer coefficient for component i, 1/s

P Gas pressure, bar

iQ Amount adsorbed for component i, kmol/kg-adsorbent

*iQ Equilibrium amount adsorbed for component i,

kmol/kg-adsorbent

pr Particle radius, m

Page 109: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 109

t Time, s

sT Solid temperature, K

R Gas constant (8.31451e-3), MJ/kmol/K

bρ Bed packing density, kg/m3

Energy Balance The CSS adsorber model (gCSS_Adsorber) uses the following energy balances to represent the heat transportations of non-isothermal system with compressible flow:

(1) In Fluid Phase:

( ) ( ) 0

2

2

=−+−+

∂+

∂+

∂+

∂−

wgHi

Hiwsgps

gtgVg

ggggVg

gbg

TTVAHTTaH

tT

Cxv

PxT

vCxT

k ερρε

2

2

xT

k gbg ∂

∂− ε Axial thermal conduction

xT

vC gggVg ∂

∂ρ Convection

xv

P g

∂ P-V work compression

tT

C gtgVg ∂

∂ερ Thermal accumulation in gas phase

( )sgps TTaH − Heat transfer between gas and solid

(adsorbent particle)

( )wgHi

Hiw TTVAH − Heat transfer between gas and the

internal wall of adsorber

Page 110: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 110

(2) In Solid Phase:

( ) 02

2

=−−

∂∂

∆+∂

∂+

∂∂

− ∑ sgpsi

iip

sbPs

ss TTaH

tQH

tTC

xTk ρρ

2

2

xTk s

s ∂∂

− Axial thermal conduction

tTC s

bPs ∂∂ρ Thermal accumulation in solid phase

∂∂

∆i

iip tQHρ Thermal accumulation by the enthalpy of

adsorption

( )sgps TTaH − Heat transfer between gas and solid

(3) In Wall phase:

( ) ( ) 02

2

=−+−−∂

∂+

∂∂

− ambwHo

Hoambwg

Ho

Hiw

wwPw

ww TT

VAHTT

VAH

tTC

xTk ρ

2

2

xTk w

w ∂∂

− Axial thermal conduction along the wall

tTC w

wPw ∂∂ρ Thermal accumulation in the wall

material

( )wgHo

Hiw TTVAH − Heat transfer between gas and wall

( )ambwHo

Hoamb TTVAH − Heat transfer between wall and

environment

Notation

pa Particle external surface area to particle volume ratio (=3/rp), m

HiA Internal wall heat transfer area, m

HoA External wall heat transfer area, m

VgC Gas mixture heat capacity, MJ/kmol/K

PsC Solid (=adsorbent particle) heat capacity, MJ/kg/K

Page 111: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 111

PwC Adsorber material (e.g., stainless steel) specific heat

capacity, MJ/kg/K

sH Fluid/solid heat transfer coefficient, MW/m2/K

wH Fluid/wall heat transfer coefficient, MW/m2/K

ambH Wall/environment heat transfer coefficient, MW/m2/K

gk Gas mixture thermal conductivity, MW/m/K

sk Solid phase thermal conductivity, MW/m/K

wk Wall phase thermal conductivity, MW/m/K

P Gas pressure, bar

iQ Amount adsorbed for component i, kmol/kg-adsorbent

t Time, s

gT Gas temperature, K

sT Solid temperature, K

wT Wall temperature, K

gv Superficial gas velocity, m/s

HiV Internal wall element volume for heat transfer, m2

HoV External wall element volume for heat transfer, m2

x Axial distance coordinate, m

iH∆ Enthalpy of adsorption for component i

(i.e., heat of adsorption), MJ/kmol

bε Bed voidage (void fraction)

tε Total voidage

gρ Gas density, kmol/m3

bρ Bed packing density, kg/m3

wρ Wall material density, kg/m3

Page 112: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 112

Adsorption Equilibrium Models

Introduction Adsorption equilibrium established after the adsorptive has been in with the adsorbed surface for a long time, and can be represented in general form:

0),,( =TQf ii ρ (Eqn 1)

In this equation, Qi is the concentration for component i on adsorbed phase, i.e., amount adsorbed, ρι is the density for component i in fluid phase, and T is the temperature. For an isothermal condition, the Eqn1 can be represented by the adsorption isotherm:

Tii fQ )(ρ= and Tii Qf )(=ρ (Eqn 2)

Eqn 2, which is commonly referred to as adsorption equilibrium isotherm, is most frequently used in researches including adsorption process simulation. For pure component adsorption, an equilibrium relationship could simply be represented by mathematical equation such as the Langmuir, the Freundlich, the Sips, the Toth, and so on. Eqn 1 can also take the following form and is called the adsorption isostere (see Ref. 1):

iQi Tf )(=ρ (Eqn 3)

However, the adsorption isostere cannot be measured directly because it is impractical to hold iQ constant.

For multi-component system, the explanation of adsorption equilibrium relationship often causes considerable attention due to a unique and complex mixing rule that governing an adsorption system of interest. For many decades, numerous researchers have considered multi-component adsorption equilibria from thermodynamic perspective and developed a number of theories or models based on various assumptions concerning the nature of adsorbed phase.

The CSS model in Aspen Adsim offers the following types of adsorption equilibrium models for multi-component system. Please note all equilibrium models only require pure equilibrium information in order to predict mixture equilibrium:

References 1 D. M. Young and A. D. Crowell, Physical Adsorption of Gases,

Butterworths, London (1962).

Page 113: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 113

Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 1

∑+=

kkk

iiii PyIP

PyIPIPQ

2

21

1

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

∑+=

kkk

iiii CIP

CIPIPQ

2

21

1

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

ii IPIP 21 , Isotherm parameters for component i

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 2

[ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑+

=

kkskk

isiiii PyTIPIP

PyTIPIPIPQ

32

321

exp1exp

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

[ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑+

=

kkskk

isiiii CTIPIP

CTIPIPIPQ

32

321

exp1exp

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iii IPIPIP 321 ,, Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

Page 114: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 114

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 3

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑+

+=

kkskk

isiisiii PyTIPIP

PyTIPIPTIPIPQ

43

4321

exp1exp

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑+

+=

kkskk

isiisiii CTIPIP

CTIPIPTIPIPQ

43

4321

exp1exp

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iiii IPIPIPIP 4321 ,,, Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for

component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e.,

amount adsorbed) for component I

Page 115: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 115

Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 4

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑+

=

kkskk

isiiIPsi

i PyTIPIPPyTIPIPTIP

Qi

43

431

exp1exp2

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑+

=

kkskk

isiiIPsi

i CTIPIPCTIPIPTIP

Qi

43

431

exp1exp2

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iiii IPIPIPIP 4321 ,,, Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for

component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration

(i.e., amount adsorbed) for component I

Page 116: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 116

Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Langmuir 5

[ ]( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑+

=

kkskk

isiisiii PyTIPIP

PyTIPIPTIPIPQ

43

4321

exp1expexp

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

[ ]( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑+

=

kkskk

isiisiii CTIPIP

CTIPIPTIPIPQ

43

4321

exp1expexp

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iiii IPIPIPIP 4321 ,,, Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for

component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e.,

amount adsorbed) for component I

Page 117: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 117

Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 1

( )( ) ∑+

=

k

IPkk

IPiii

i k

i

PyIPPyIPIPQ

3

3

2

21

1

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

∑+=

k

IPkk

IPiii

i k

i

CIPCIPIPQ

3

3

2

21

1

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iIP? Isotherm parameters for component i

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

Page 118: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 118

Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 2

[ ]( )( )[ ]( )( ) ∑ +

+

+=

k

TIPIPkskk

TIPIPisiii

i skk

sii

PyTIPIPPyTIPIPIPQ

54

54

32

321

exp1exp

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

[ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑ +

+

+=

k

TIPIPkskk

TIPIPisiii

i skk

sii

CTIPIPCTIPIPIPQ

54

54

32

321

exp1exp

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iIP? Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

Page 119: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 119

Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 3

( ) [ ]( )( )[ ]( )( ) ∑ +

+

++

=

k

TIPIPkskk

TIPIPisiisii

i skk

sii

PyTIPIPPyTIPIPTIPIPQ

65

65

43

4321

exp1exp

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑ +

+

++

=

k

TIPIPiskk

TIPIPisiisii

i skk

sii

CTIPIPCTIPIPTIPIPQ

65

65

43

4321

exp1exp

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iIP? Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

Page 120: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 120

Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 4

( ) [ ]( )( )[ ]( )( ) ∑ +

+

+=

k

TIPIPkskk

TIPIPisii

IPsi

i skk

siii

PyTIPIPPyTIPIPTIPQ

65

652

43

431

exp1exp

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑ +

+

+=

k

TIPIPiskk

TIPIPisii

IPsi

i skk

siii

CTIPIPCTIPIPTIPQ

65

652

43

431

exp1exp

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iIP? Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

Page 121: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 121

Mathematical Equation Form for Loading Ratio Correlation 5

[ ]( ) [ ]( )( )[ ]( )( ) ∑ +

+

+=

k

TIPIPkskk

TIPIPisiisii

i skk

sii

PyTIPIPPyTIPIPTIPIPQ

65

65

43

4321

exp1expexp

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

[ ]( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑ +

+

+=

k

TIPIPiskk

TIPIPisiisii

i skk

sii

CTIPIPCTIPIPTIPIPQ

65

65

43

4321

exp1expexp

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iIP? Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

Page 122: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 122

Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Dual-Site Langmuir 1

∑∑ ++

+=

kkk

iii

kkk

iiii PyIP

PyIPIPPyIPPyIPIP

Q4

43

2

21

11

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

∑∑ ++

+=

kkk

iii

kkk

iiii CIP

CIPIPCIPCIPIP

Q4

43

2

21

11

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iIP? Isotherm parameters for component i

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

Page 123: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 123

Mathematical Equation Form for Extended Dual-Site Langmuir 2

[ ]( )[ ]( )

[ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑∑ +

++

=

kkskk

isiii

kkskk

isiiii PyTIPIP

PyTIPIPIPPyTIPIPPyTIPIPIP

Q65

654

32

321

exp1exp

exp1exp

(Pressure dependent equilibrium)

[ ]( )[ ]( )

[ ]( )[ ]( ) ∑∑ +

++

=

kkskk

isiii

kkskk

isiiii CTIPIP

CTIPIPIPCTIPIPCTIPIPIP

Q65

654

32

321

exp1exp

exp1exp

(Concentration dependent equilibrium)

iIP? Isotherm parameters for component i

sT Adsorbent particle temperature in Kelvin

P Total gas pressure

iy Gas phase mole fraction for component i

iC Fluid phase concentration for component i

iQ Adsorbed phase concentration (i.e., amount

adsorbed) for component I

I.A.S.T. (Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory) The IAST1 is a widely used engineering thermodynamic method, analogues to Raoults law in vapor-liquid equilibrium. The inputs to the IAST calculation are the pure-component adsorption isotherms at the temperature of interest, and the output is a prediction of mixture equilibrium.

It has been known that the deviations from IAST might result from the chemical dissimilarity of the adsorptive species (as for deviations from Raoults law in vapor-liquid equilibrium) or from the heterogeneity of the adsorbent. Adsorbent heterogeneity might be present in one of following forms2: chemical or structural heterogeneity of the adsorbent surface3, variation of pore size and shape (either along the axis of individual pores or among the pores), or due to connectivity effects4,5.

Nonideal adsorption can be accommodated in the general framework of adsorbed solution theory by real adsorbed solution theory (RAST1) , in which nonideal interactions between the adsorbates on the adsorbent surface are accounted for by activity coefficients, and by heterogeneous ideal adsorbed

Page 124: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 124

solution theory (HIAST6), in which the energetic heterogeneity of the adsorbent is taken into account.

Subject to the assumption of an ideal adsorbed phase, equality of chemical potential in the bulk gas and adsorbed phases implies:

0iii fxf = (Eqn 1)

where if is the fugacity of component i in the bulk gas phase and ix is the

mole fraction of component i in the adsorbed phase; 0if is the standard-

state fugacity, that is, the fugacity of pure component i at the mixture spreading pressure, π ,when the adsorbed and bulk gas phases are in equilibrium. Please note, Eqn 1 describes the ideal adsorbed phase contacting with real (i.e., nonideal) gas phase, which is accounted by introducing gas fugacity instead of gas pressure. When an assumption of ideal gas phase is invoked, then the basic equation of IAST can be written by:

0iii PxPy = (Eqn 1)

where P is total gas pressure, iy is the gas mole fraction for component i and ix is the mole fraction of component i in the adsorbed phase; 0

iP is the

standard-state pressure, that is, the pressure of pure component i at the mixture spreading pressure, π ,when the adsorbed and bulk gas phases are in equilibrium.

The spreading pressure is obtained from the experimental adsorption isotherm, i.e., ( )ii PQ or ( )ii CQ , via the Gibbs adsorption isotherm:

∫=0

0lnif

ii fdQRTAπ

(nonideal gas phase assumption) (Eqn 3)

∫=0

0lniP

ii PdQRTAπ

(ideal gas phase assumption) (Eqn 4)

where A is the surface area of the adsorbent (which is not required in practice, as the product Aπ need not be separated in the calculation), R is the gas constant, T is the temperature, if and iP are the fugacity and the

pressure for pure component i . The complete description of the IAST as a predictive tool for multicomponent adsorption equilibria requires an expression for total amount adsorbed, TQ :

∑=i i

i

T Qx

Q 0

1 (Eqn 5)

and the stoichiometric constraint:

1=∑i

ix (Eqn 6)

In Eqn 5, 0iQ is the amount component i adsorbed at the standard-state

pressure.

Page 125: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 125

The CSS model in Aspen Adsim supports a comprehensive tool in applying the IAST. The main benefits from the IAST application within the CSS model are:

• Capability to account gas phase nonideality by considering the gas fugacity that may be evaluated by either Aspen Properties or User Procedure.

• No restriction for the type of pure component isotherm in the IAST calculation (namely, isotherm type free IAST). For example, it is now available to assign the best-fit isotherm equation to each component (e.g., the Langmuir isotherm for 1st component, the Freundlich isotherm for 2nd component, the Sips isotherm for 3rd component, so on.), instead of using a specific type isotherm for all adsorbates. The available pure isotherm equations for the IAST within CSS model may be found at:

List of Pure Isotherms Available in IAST Calculation of CSS model

References 1 Myers, A. L.; Prausnitz, J. M. AIChE J. 1965, 11, 121.

2 Yun, J.-H.; Düren, T.; Keil, F. J.; Seaton, N. A. Langmuir 2002, 18, in print.

3 Rudzinski, W.; Everett, D. M. Adsorption of Gases on Heterogeneous Surfaces; Academic Press: New York, 1992.

4 López-Ramon, M. V.; Jagiello, J.; Bandosz, T. J.; Seaton, N. A. Langmuir 1997, 13, 4435.

5 Davies, G. M.; Seaton, N. A. Langmuir 1999, 15, 6263.

6 Valenzuela, D.; Myers, A. L.; Talu, O.; Zwiebel, I. AIChE J. 1988, 34, 397.

Pure Isotherm List for the IAST Calculation of CSS The following are the pure isotherm equations available in the IAST calculation by CSS bed model (gCSS_Adsorber) from Aspen Adsim 2004.1. In the application, any combination of the pure isotherm equations will be acceptable in representing mixture adsorption equilibria by means of IAST, as predictive equilibrium theory.

Langmuir 1 - 2 parameters / isothermal assumption

Langmuir 2 - 3 parameters / temperature correlation

Langmuir 3 - 4 parameters / temperature correlation

Langmuir 4 - 4 parameters / temperature correlation

Langmuir 5 - 4 parameters / temperature correlation

Dual Site Langmuir 1 - 4 parameters / isothermal assumption

Dual Site Langmuir 2 - 6 parameters / temperature correlation

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 1 - 3 parameters / isothermal assumption

Page 126: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 126

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 2 - 5 parameters / temperature correlation

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 3 - 6 parameters / temperature correlation

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 4 - 6 parameters / temperature correlation

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 5 - 6 parameters / temperature correlation

Henry 1 - 1 parameters / isothermal assumption

Henry 2 - 2 parameters / temperature correlation

Henry 3 - 2 parameters / temperature correlation

Henry 4 - 2 parameters / temperature correlation

Freundlich 1 - 2 parameters / isothermal assumption

Toth 1 - 3 parameters / isothermal assumption

BET 1 - 1 parameters /

Langmuir 1 Pressure dependent

ii

iiii PIP

PIPIPQ

2

21

1+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

Concentration dependent

ii

iiii CIP

CIPIPQ

2

21

1+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

Langmuir 2 Pressure dependent

Page 127: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 127

[ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiiii PTIPIP

PTIPIPIPQ

32

321

exp1exp

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

[ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiiii CTIPIP

CTIPIPIPQ

32

321

exp1exp

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Langmuir 3 Pressure dependent

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiiiii PTIPIP

PTIPIPTIPIPQ

43

4321

exp1exp

++

=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg/ K]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Page 128: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 128

Concentration dependent

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiiiii CTIPIP

CTIPIPTIPIPQ

43

4321

exp1exp

++

=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg/K]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Langmuir 4 Pressure dependent

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiiIP

ii PTIPIP

PTIPIPTIPQ

i

43

431

exp1exp2

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol.K/kg-

adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-

adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiiIP

ii CTIPIP

CTIPIPTIPQ

i

43

431

exp1exp2

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol.K/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

Page 129: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 129

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-

adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Langmuir 5 Pressure dependent

[ ]( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiiiii PTIPIP

PTIPIPTIPIPQ

43

4321

exp1expexp

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

[ ]( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiiiii CTIPIP

CTIPIPTIPIPQ

43

4321

exp1expexp

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Page 130: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 130

Dual-Site Langmuir 1 Pressure dependent

ii

iii

ii

iiii PIP

PIPIPPIPPIPIP

Q4

43

2

21

11 ++

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

Concentration dependent

ii

iii

ii

iiii CIP

CIPIPCIPCIPIP

Q4

43

2

21

11 ++

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

Dual-Site Langmuir 2 Pressure dependent

[ ]( )[ ]( )

[ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiii

iii

iiiii PTIPIP

PTIPIPIPPTIPIPPTIPIPIP

Q65

654

32

321

exp1exp

exp1exp

++

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

Page 131: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 131

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP6 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

[ ]( )[ ]( )

[ ]( )[ ]( ) iii

iiii

iii

iiiii CTIPIP

CTIPIPIPCTIPIPCTIPIPIP

Q65

654

32

321

exp1exp

exp1exp

++

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP6 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 1 Pressure dependent

i

i

IPii

IPiii

i PIPPIPIP

Q3

3

2

21

1+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

Page 132: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 132

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

Concentration dependent

i

i

IPii

IPiii

i CIPCIPIP

Q3

3

2

21

1+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 2 Pressure dependent

[ ]( )[ ]( ) TIPIP

iii

TIPIPiiii

i ii

ii

PTIPIPPTIPIPIPQ

54

54

32

321

exp1exp

+

+

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

[ ]( )[ ]( ) TIPIP

iii

TIPIPiiii

i ii

ii

CTIPIPCTIPIPIPQ

54

54

32

321

exp1exp

+

+

+=

Page 133: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 133

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 3 Pressure dependent

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) TIPIP

iii

TIPIPiiiii

i ii

ii

PTIPIPPTIPIPTIPIPQ

65

65

43

4321

exp1exp

+

+

++

=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg/K]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP6 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) TIPIP

iii

TIPIPiiiii

i ii

ii

CTIPIPCTIPIPTIPIPQ

65

65

43

4321

exp1exp

+

+

++

=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

Page 134: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 134

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg/K]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP6 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 4 Pressure dependent

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) TIPIP

iii

TIPIPiii

IPi

i ii

iii

PTIPIPPTIPIPTIP

Q65

652

43

431

exp1exp

+

+

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol.K/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP6 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) TIPIP

iii

TIPIPiii

IPi

i ii

iii

CTIPIPCTIPIPTIP

Q65

652

43

431

exp1exp

+

+

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol.K/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

Page 135: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 135

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP6 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Sips (Langmuir-Freundlich) 5 Pressure dependent

[ ]( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) TIPIP

iii

TIPIPiiiii

i ii

ii

PTIPIPPTIPIPTIPIPQ65

65

43

4321

exp1expexp

+

+

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP6 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

[ ]( ) [ ]( )[ ]( ) TIPIP

iii

TIPIPiiiii

i ii

ii

CTIPIPCTIPIPTIPIPQ65

65

43

4321

exp1expexp

+

+

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

Page 136: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 136

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP4 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iIP5 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iIP6 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Henry 1 Pressure dependent

iii PIPQ 1=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/bar/kg-adsorbent]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

Concentration dependent

iii CIPQ 1=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [m3/kg-adsorbent]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

Henry 2 Pressure dependent

( ) iiii PTIPIPQ 21 +=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/bar/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/bar/K/kg-adsorbent]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

Page 137: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 137

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

( ) iiii CTIPIPQ 21 +=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [m3/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [m3/K/kg-adsorbent]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Henry 3 Pressure dependent

( ) iIP

ii PTIPQ i21=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol.K/bar/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

( ) iIP

ii CTIPQ i21=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K.m3/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Henry 4 Pressure dependent

Page 138: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 138

[ ]( ) iiii PTIPIPQ 21 exp=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/bar/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

T Temperature [K]

Concentration dependent

[ ]( ) iiii CTIPIPQ 21 exp=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [m3/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [K]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

T Temperature [K]

Freundlich 1 Pressure dependent

iIPiii PIPQ 2

1=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/bar/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

Concentration dependent

iIPiii CIPQ 2

1=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [m3/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

Page 139: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 139

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

Toth 1 Pressure dependent

( ) ii IPIPii

iii

PIP

PIPQ33

1

2

1

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [bar]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

Concentration dependent

( ) ii IPIPii

iii

CIP

CIPQ33

1

2

1

+=

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/m3]

iIP3 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

BET 1 Pressure dependent

+−

=

si

iis

i

isi

i

si

iii

i

PP

IPPP

PP

PP

IPIPQ

2

21

11

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

Page 140: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 140

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iP Equilibrium pressure of comp i [bar]

siP Saturated vapour pressure of comp i [bar]

Concentration dependent

+−

=

RTPC

IPRTPC

RTPC

RTPC

IPIPQ

si

iis

i

isi

i

si

iii

i

2

21

11

iIP1 Isotherm parameter of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iIP2 Isotherm parameter of comp i [-]

iQ Equilibrium loading of comp i [kmol/kg-adsorbent]

iC Equilibrium concentration of comp i [kmol/m3]

siP Saturated vapour pressure of comp i [bar]

R Gas constant, 8.31433e-2 [bar.m3/kmol/K]

T Temperature [K]

User Guidelines

How to Create a CSS Simulation Flowsheet Preconditions: The user must hold the licenses for Aspen Adsim 2004.1 and Aspen Properties 2004.1 (or Aspen Plus 2004.1). The property file, named air.appdf, is used for component properties definition.

1 Start Aspen Adsim 2004.1.

2 Initialize component properties by loading a property definition.

Page 141: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 141

3 Choose target components from the component list.

(Example. A user chooses N2 and O2 as the components for a simulation.)

4 Select CSS_Info from Structure Types folder by either pressing [Ctrl + I]

or clicking the right mouse button and choosing Create Instance.

Page 142: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 142

5 A dialog box is displayed for the name of the structure instance, and user

enters a name.

(Example. Enter CSSInfo as the name of the structure instance.)

6 Aspen Adsim shows the instance in a folder of the same name below

Flowsheet\Structures folder.

Page 143: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 143

7 Select the global non-isothermal/isothermal option by choosing TRUE or FALSE the logical parameter, NonIsothermal, from the Specify Table of the instanced structure.

(Example. Switch the global NonIsothermal parameter to TRUE from the Specify Table of the instance structure CSSInfo.)

Page 144: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 144

8 Construct a simulation flowsheet using models from the CSS folder of

Aspen Adsim Gas Library.

(Example. Re-construct N2PSACSS - supplied as one of Aspen Adsim 2004.1 demonstrations.)

Page 145: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 145

9 The connect models using the stream, gCSS_Material_Connection, from the Stream Types folder of Aspen Adsim Library and rename each model, as shown in the picture.

(Example. Re-construct N2PSACSS - supplied as one of Aspen Adsim 2004.1 demonstrations.)

10 Specify models by putting assumptions and parameter values that are

required for process simulation.

The following are typical items for the N2PSACSS example.

i Bed1 (gCSS_Adsorber): Click the right mouse button and select Specify table from the Forms menu and specify the CSS bed model B1. Leave all items as default, except the following:

Layer(1).xNodes 10

Layer(1).NonAdiabatic True

Layer(1).RigorousWallBalance True

Page 146: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 146

ii Bed1 (gCSS_Adsorber): Use right mouse button and select Specify_ table from Forms and specify the CSS bed model B1. Leave all items as default, except the following:

Layer(1).Hs 1e-007

Layer(1).Ta 298.15

Layer(1).IP("N2",1) 0.00267288

Layer(1).IP("N2",2) 0.136

Layer(1).IP("O2",1) 0.00267287

Layer(1).IP("O2",2) 0.1413

Layer(1).ksLDF("N2") 0.00760501

Layer(1).ksLDF("O2") 0.04476

Table - Specify

Page 147: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 147

Table - Specify_

Page 148: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 148

iii TD1 and TD2 (gCSS_TankVoid): these two tank/void models have the

same specification.

The following items should be changed:

Ta 298.15

NonAdiabaticTankVoid True

Hamb 1.e-005

Page 149: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 149

Hw 6.e-005

TD1

TD2

iv. VP1 (gCSS_Valve): change CheckValve option to True

VP1

11 Select the Cycle Organizer from the Tools menu. Aspen Adsim displays

the icon, Cycle_Organizer, on the simulation flowsheet, with a dialog box from Cycle Organizer.

Page 150: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 150

12 Cyclic Steady State simulation mode can be chosen by selecting Cycle

Options from the Cycle menu. To define a CSS simulation flowsheet, check the check box out, Cyclic Steady-State mode.

Page 151: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 151

13 Define process cycle/step information within the Step menu. For this

example, N2PSACSS, we have four process steps, and the interaction and control details are as follows:

Page 152: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 152

STEP1

Page 153: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 153

STEP2

STEP3

STEP4

Page 154: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 154

14 Define the variable to be manipulated and the values within the Cycle

Organizer.

STEP1

STEP2

Page 155: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 155

STEP3

STEP4

Page 156: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 156

15 Generate a Cycle Task either by executing Generate Task from Cycle

menu or by clicking Generate Cycle from the status bar of Cycle Organizer. Aspen Adsim displays a green check-shape icon on the status bar, indicating a Cycle Task has been created correctly.

BEFORE

AFTER

Page 157: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 157

16 Close the Cycle Organizer, then confirm Aspen Adsim shows a green

square on the simulation status bar and that the simulation mode is now set Steady State. If so, the simulation is ready to be run in CSS mode.

Page 158: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 158

How to Create a Dynamic Simulation Flowsheet using CSS Models Preconditions: The user must be a the licensed user of Aspen Adsim 2004.1 and Aspen Properties 2004.1 (or Aspen Plus 2004.1). The property file, named air.appdf, is used for component properties definition.

1 Start Aspen Adsim 2004.1.

2 Initialize component properties by loading a property definition.

3 Choose target components from the component list.

(Example. Choose N2 and O2 as the components for a simulation.)

Page 159: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 159

4 Select CSS_Info from the Structure Types folder by either pressing [Ctrl

+ I] or clicking right mouse button and choosing Create Instance.

Page 160: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 160

5 A dialog box is displayed to enter the name of the structure instance, and

the user enters a name.

(Example. Enter CSSInfo as the name of the structure instance.)

6 Aspen Adsim displays the instance in a folder of the same name below the

Flowsheet\Structures folder.

Page 161: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 161

7 Select the global non-isothermal/isothermal option by choosing TRUE or

FALSE the logical parameter, NonIsothermal, from the Specify Table of the instanced structure.

(Example. Switch the global NonIsothermal parameter to TRUE from the Specify Table of the instance structure CSSInfo.)

Page 162: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 162

8 Construct a simulation flowsheet using models from the CSS folder of Aspen Adsim Gas Library.

(Example. Re-construct N2PSACSS - supplied as one of Aspen Adsim 2004.1 demonstrations.)

9 Next, connect models using the stream, gCSS_Material_Connection,

from the Stream Types folder of Aspen Adsim Library and rename each model, as shown in the picture.

(Example. Re-construct N2PSACSS - supplied as one of Aspen Adsim 2004.1 demonstrations.)

Page 163: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 163

10 Specify models by putting assumptions and parameter values required for

the process simulation. the following are typical items for the N2PSACSS example.

v. Bed1 (gCSS_Adsorber): Click the right mouse button and select Specify table from Forms menu, then specify the CSS bed model B1. leave all items as default, except the following:

Layer(1).xNodes 10

Layer(1).NonAdiabatic True

Layer(1).RigorousWallBalance True

vi. Bed1 (gCSS_Adsorber): Click the right mouse button and select Specify_ table from Forms and specify the CSS bed model B1 - leave all items as default, except the following:

Layer(1).Hs 1e-007

Layer(1).Ta 298.15

Layer(1).IP("N2",1) 0.00267288

Layer(1).IP("N2",2) 0.136

Layer(1).IP("O2",1) . 00267287

Layer(1).IP("O2",2) 0.1413

Layer(1).ksLDF("N2") 0.00760501

Page 164: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 164

Layer(1).ksLDF("O2") 0.04476

Table - Specify

Page 165: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 165

Table - Specify_

Page 166: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 166

vii. TD1 and TD2 (gCSS_TankVoid): these two tank/void models have the same specification. The following items should be changed:

Ta 298.15

NonAdiabaticTankVoid True

Hamb 1.e-005

Hw 6.e-005

TD1

TD2

viii. VP1 (gCSS_Valve): change CheckValve option to True.

VP1

Page 167: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 167

11 Select Cycle Organizer from the Tools menu; Aspen Adsim displays the

icon Cycle_Organizer, on the simulation flowsheet and the Cycle Organizer dialog box.

12 Non Cyclic Steady State simulation mode can be chosen from the Cycle

Options in the Cycle menu. To define a dynamic simulation flowsheet, uncheck Cyclic Steady-State mode check box and enter the value of Maximum cycle for dynamic simulation.

13 Define process cycle/step information within the Step menu. For this example, N2PSACSS, we have four process steps, and the interaction and control details are as follows:

Page 168: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 168

STEP1

Page 169: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 169

STEP2

STEP3

STEP4

Page 170: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 170

14 Define the variable to be manipulated and the values within Cycle

Organizer.

STEP1

STEP2

Page 171: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 171

STEP3

STEP4

Page 172: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 172

15 Generate a Cycle Task either by executing Generate Task from Cycle

menu or by clicking Generate Cycle from the status bar of Cycle Organizer. Aspen Adsim displays a green check-shape icon on the status bar, indicating the Cycle Task has been created correctly.

BEFORE

AFTER

Page 173: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 173

16 Close Cycle Organizer and confirm that Aspen Adsim displays a green

square on the simulation status bar and that simulation mode is now set Dynamic. If so, the simulation is ready to be run in dynamic mode.

Page 174: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 174

How to Convert a CSS Flowsheet to a Dynamic Flowsheet Preconditions: There is an existing Aspen Adsim 2004.1 data file defined in CSS mode to convert the simulation mode from CSS to dynamic. If you are not sure which Aspen Adsim data file is defined in CSS mode, please refer to How to Create a CSS Simulation Flowsheet.

1 Open the existing Aspen Adsim flowsheet (defined in CSS simulation mode).

2 Activate the Cycle Organizer by double-clicking the icon and locate the Cyclic Steady-State mode check box on the Cyclic Options Tab.

3 Uncheck the check box to convert the flowsheet from CSS to dynamic. The

Cyclic Organizer displays a dialog box to ask the Maximum Variable Steps option (recommended answer is Yes).

Page 175: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 175

4 Enter the maximum cycles value (e.g., 20) in the Cycle Options Tab and

generate the Cycle Task either by executing Generate Task from Cycle menu or by clicking Generate Cycle from the status bar of Cycle Organizer. Aspen Adsim displays a green check-shape icon on the status bar, indicating the Cycle Task has been created correctly.

BEFORE

AFTER

Page 176: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 176

5 Close the Cycle Organizer and then confirm Aspen Adsim displays a green

square on the simulation status bar and if simulation mode is now set Dynamic. If so, the simulation is ready to be run in dynamic mode.

Page 177: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 177

How to Convert a Dynamic Flowsheet into a CSS Flowsheet Preconditions: There is an existing Aspen Adsim 2004.1 dynamic flowsheet created using CSS models and the user wishes to convert the simulation mode from dynamic to CSS. If you are not sure which Aspen Adsim data file is defined in dynamic mode using CSS models, please refer to How to Create a Dynamic Simulation Flowsheet using CSS Models.

1 Open an existing Aspen Adsim flowsheet (defined in dynamic simulation mode).

2 Activate the Cycle Organizer by double-clicking the icon and locate the Cyclic Steady-State mode check box on the Cyclic Options Tab. Check the check box to re-define the simulation as CSS flowsheet.

BEFORE

Page 178: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 178

AFTER

Page 179: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 179

3 After confirming (from the status bar of Cycle Organizer) the Cycle Task is

active, close the Cycle Organizer. If the Task is not active, generate a Cycle Task either by executing Generate Task from Cycle menu or by clicking Generate Cycle from the status bar of Cycle Organizer.

4 Aspen Adsim displays a green square on the simulation status bar and the simulation mode is now set to Steady State. If so, the simulation is ready to be run in CSS mode.

Page 180: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 180

Developers Tips to Get Better Convergence Property in CSS Simulation 1 Careful consideration in setting Solver Property options is required to

ensure convergence of CSS models. In the Non Linear Solver Tab, we recommend selecting the Newton Method for CSS simulation whilst the Fast Newton is normally recommendable in a dynamic simulation.

2 Convergence criterion is recommended to set Residual and Variable.

3 Max. step reductions value should be maximized as 20.

4 Recommended Max. iterations value is 5000.

5 The value of Maximum variable step is highly sensitive for the convergence property. For CSS simulation, a recommended default value is 200, and this may be adjusted (normally increase as problem is complex) but should not exceed 500. Note that the value of the Maximum variable step must be reduced if the flowsheet follows dynamic (not exceed 50).

Page 181: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 181

Recommended Non Linear Solver Property

6 A new check box, Use transpose, has been added to the Solver

Properties dialog Linear Solver Tab. The recommended selection for this option is CSS simulation.

Page 182: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 182

7 The following dialog shows the recommended tolerance table for CSS

simulation.

Page 183: Aspen Adsim

2 Gas Cyclic Steady State Modeling 183

Page 184: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 184

3 Ion-Exchange Processes

This chapter contains for information on:

• About Ion-Exchange Processes

• Bed Model Assumptions for Ion-Exchange Processes

• Configure Form for Ion-Exchange Processes

• Configure Layer Form for Ion-Exchange Processes

• General Tab

• Material/Momentum Balance Tab

• About Axial Dispersion in Ion-Exchange Processes

• Kinetic Model Tab

• Isotherm Tab

• Summary of Mass Balance Equations for Ion-Exchange Processes

About Ion-Exchange Processes In ion-exchange processes, a fluid phase (such as an aqueous solution) containing cations and anions, is contacted with an ion-exchange resin. Typically, the ion-exchange resin is inside a packed bed adsorption column. The resin contains bound groups carrying a positive or negative ionic charge, which are accompanied by displaceable ions of opposite charge (counterions). The displaceable ions have the same charge as the ions of interest in the fluid phase: since the ions in the fluid phase have a greater affinity for the bound groups than those originally present, the latter are displaced by the former. Generally, the resin has a fixed total charge capacity, so one ionic solute is exchanged for another while maintaining charge neutrality.

Ion-exchange processes have become an important separation technique for aqueous electrolyte solutions and are used in these applications:

• Water softening, where monovalent cations replace multivalent cations.

• Water purification, where hydrogen or hydroxide ions replace cations (usually monovalent).

• Multi-component separation of ionic mixtures of different type and charge.

Ion-exchange may be written as a reversible reaction involving charge equivalent quantities. For example, in a water-softening process, the cation-exchange process is written as:

Ca NaR CaR Na2+ ++ ⇔ +2 22

Page 185: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 185

where R is a stationary, univalent, anionic group in the poly-electrolyte network of the exchange phase.

Bed Model Assumptions for Ion-Exchange The bed model assumptions for ion-exchange are:

• Overall and component material balances apply for the liquid phase.

• Isothermal conditions apply.

• Plug flow or plug flow with axial dispersion applies.

• The liquid stream pressure is constant (no frictional pressure drop).

• The superficial velocity and thus volumetric flow rate remain constant. (The ion components are dilute so the effect of adsorption on the overall mass balance is negligible.)

• Ideal mixing occurs in the aqueous phase. Since the ionic components are very dilute, overall molar volume remains constant.

• Changes in molar volume between distinct, sequentially fed fluids are allowed.

• The total exchange capacity of the bed Q is constant.

• A lumped mass-transfer rate applies, with a liquid- or solid-film resistance. This resistance is either linear, quadratic, or user-defined.

• The mass-action equilibrium is one alternative model for ion-exchange behavior. Others include the extended Langmuir and extended Langmuir-Freundlich models.

Configure Form (ionx) In the Configure Form of the Ion-exchange process bed model:

• Enter the number of layers within the bed (1 or more).

• Click in the Description box for each layer and type in a brief name or description.

• Click Configure to open the Configure Layer dialog box.

• Click Specify to open the specify form for the layer model.

Configure Layer Form (ionx) Use the options in the Configure Layer form to specify the set of equations within each layer of the bed.

For more information on choosing the options for your ion-exchange process, see these sections:

• General tab

• Material/Momentum Balance tab

• Kinetic Model tab

• Isotherm tab

Page 186: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 186

General Tab (ionx) Use the General tab to specify these options for your ion-exchange process:

• Discretization method

• Number of nodes

General Tab (ionx): Discretization Method to be Used These discretization methods are available for ion-exchange processes:

• UDS1

• UDS2

• CDS1

• LDS

• QDS

• MIXED

• BUDS

General Tab (ionx): Number of Nodes In the Number of Nodes box, choose an appropriate number of nodes for your chosen discretization method.

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (ionx) Use the Material/Momentum Balance tab to specify the basic assumptions about material dispersion in the liquid phase for ion-exchange processes.

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (ionx): Material Balance Assumption In the Material Balance Assumption box, choose from one of the following options:

• Convection Only

• Convection with Constant Dispersion

• Convection with Estimated Dispersion

• Convection with User Procedure Dispersion

• Convection with User Submodel Dispersion

Material Balance Assumption (ionx): Convection Only

This option omits the dispersion term from the material balance, so the model represents plug flow with a zero dispersion coefficient (infinite Peclet number).

Page 187: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 187

Because the dispersion term is omitted, you do not need to supply the dispersion coefficient.

Material Balance Assumption (ionx): Convection with Constant Dispersion

The Convection with Constant Dispersion option includes the dispersion term in the material balance for the bed. You must then supply a fixed value for the dispersion coefficient, zE .

With this option, the dispersion coefficient is constant for all components throughout the bed.

Material Balance Assumption (ionx): Convection with Estimated Dispersion

The Convection with Estimated dispersion option includes the dispersion term in the material balance for the bed.

Here, the dispersion coefficient varies along the length of the bed. Aspen Adsim estimates the components' dispersion coefficients in an ion-exchange bed using this correlation (Slater, 1991):

48.0

011.02.0

+=

iz

Pl ReEdv

ε

where:

zE = Axial dispersion coefficient

lv = Liquid Velocity

iε = Interparticle voidage

pd = Particle diameter

µρ lPll vdMRe = = Reynolds number

µ = Liquid viscosity

lρ = Liquid molar density

lM = Liquid molecular weight

Material Balance Assumption (ionx): Convection with User Procedure Dispersion

The Convection with User Procedure Dispersion option includes the dispersion term in the material balance for the bed.

The dispersion coefficient varies with axial position according to a user-supplied Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces using the procedure pUser_i_Dispersion.

Page 188: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 188

Material Balance Assumption (ionx): Convection with User Submodel Dispersion

The Convection with User Submodel Dispersion option includes the dispersion term in the material balance for the bed.

The dispersion coefficient varies with axial position according to the user-supplied submodel iUserDispersion.

About Axial Dispersion in Ion-Exchange Processes As a fluid flows through a packed column such as an ion-exchange bed, axial dispersion (mixing) tends to occur, which reduces the efficiency of separation. Axial dispersion should be minimized in bed design, but, if it occurs, then Aspen Adsim must account for its effects.

There are several sources of axial dispersion in ion-exchange processes (Ruthven, 1984):

• Channeling caused by non-uniform packing, for example where different sections of the packing have different voidages.

• Dispersion from wall effects due to non-uniform packing at the wall. This can be avoided by packing the bed well, and having a sufficiently large ratio of bed-to-particle diameters.

• Hold-up of liquid in the laminar boundary layer surrounding the particles combined with small random fluctuations in the flow.

• Splitting and recombining of the flow around the particles.

The molecular diffusivities of liquids are too small to contribute significantly to axial dispersion. In general, the mixing effects are additive and can be lumped together into a single effective dispersion coefficient, zE . The dispersion term in the material balance is usually expressed as:

2

2

zc

E kzi ∂

∂ε−

The type of flow determines whether this term is omitted or included in the material balance.

Deciding When to Use Axial Dispersion in Ion-Exchange Processes In deciding whether to include axial dispersion in the bed model, it is useful to work out the Peclet number, given an effective dispersion coefficient ( zE ), a

liquid superficial velocity ( lv ), and a bed height ( bH ):

z

b

EHv

Pe l=

Page 189: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 189

The Peclet number quantifies the degree of dispersion introduced into the system. It is dimensionless so is more convenient than the dispersion coefficient for this purpose.

The following table shows the effect of different values of Peclet number:

If the Peclet number is

The effect of axial dispersion on bed performance is

0 Infinite: the bulk liquid is perfectly mixed., so the liquid composition is homogeneous throughout the entire bed.

< 30 Significant.

> 100 Very slight: The bed operates under near plug flow conditions.

∞ Zero: The bed operates under plug flow conditions.

Numerical methods used to discretize the spatial derivatives in the general equations can also introduce an artificial form of dispersion.

Kinetic Model Tab (ionx) The overall mass transfer of ionic components between the bulk liquid phase and the adsorbed phase must overcome two resistances:

• Mass transfer resistance located in the boundary layer surrounding the particle.

• Mass transfer resistance inside the resin particle.

Typically, the second resistance determines the overall mass transfer rate.

Aspen Adsim lumps the overall resistance to mass transfer into a single overall factor. You select the type of resistance from:

• Film Model Assumption

• Kinetic Model Assumption

• Form of Lumped Resistance

• Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient

Kinetic Model Tab (ionx): Film Model Assumption In the Film Model Assumption box, choose from:

• Solid The mass transfer driving force is expressed as a function of the solid phase loading (solid film).

• Fluid The mass transfer driving force is expressed as a function of the liquid phase concentration (liquid film).

Page 190: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 190

Kinetic Model Tab (ionx): Kinetic Model Assumption In the Kinetic Model Assumption box, choose from:

• Lumped Resistance

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Kinetic Model Assumption (ionx): Lumped Resistance

Here, the mass transfer driving force for component k is expressed as a function of the liquid phase concentration (liquid film), or solid phase loading (solid film).

This function is either linear or quadratic. See Form of Lumped Resistance, later.

Kinetic Model Assumption (ionx): User Procedure

With this option, the component rates of mass transfer are related to local conditions in the bed through a relationship you supply in a Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces using the procedure pUser_i_Kinetic.

Kinetic Model Assumption (ionx): User Submodel

With User Submodel selected, the component rates of mass transfer are related to local conditions in the bed through the user submodel iUserKinetic.

Kinetic Model Tab (ionx): Form of Lumped Resistance This option is active only if you selected Lumped Resistance as your Kinetic Model assumption.

The following options are available:

• Linear

• Quadratic

Form of Lumped Resistance (ionx): Linear

The mass transfer driving force for component k is expressed as a linear function of the liquid phase concentration or solid phase loading.

)( *kkk

k ccMTCltw

−=∂

∂ (fluid film)

)( *kkk

k wwMTCstw

−=∂

∂ (solid film)

Page 191: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 191

Form of Lumped Resistance (ionx): Quadratic

The mass transfer driving force is expressed as a quadratic function of the liquid phase concentration (fluid film) or solid phase loading (solid film).

k

kkk

k

ccc

MTCltw

2))(( 2*2 −

=∂

∂ (fluid film)

k

kkk

k

www

MTCstw

2))(( 22* −

=∂

∂ (solid film)

Kinetic Model Tab (ionx): Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient Use this option to specify how to define the mass transfer coefficients. Choose from:

• Constant

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient (ionx): Constant

With this option, the mass transfer coefficient for each component is constant throughout the bed. You must supply a constant value of mass transfer coefficient for each component in the Specify table of the layer.

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient (ionx): User Procedure

Here, the mass transfer coefficients are functions of local bed conditions. The function is implemented in a Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces using the procedure pUser_i_MTC.

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient (ionx): User Submodel

With User Submodel selected, the mass transfer coefficients are functions of local bed conditions, and are returned through the user submodel iUserMTC.

Isotherm Tab (ionx) Use the Isotherm tab to specify the adsorption isotherms for use in your ion-exchange process.

About Adsorption Isotherms for Ion-Exchange Processes The driving force behind an ion-exchange separation process is the departure from adsorption equilibrium between the aqueous and adsorbed phases. Consequently, adsorption isotherms (also known as ion-exchange equilibria) are important data in the design of ion-exchangers. Aspen Adsim has a list of commonly used, standard multi-component adsorption isotherms.

Page 192: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 192

Important: The equations presented are for equilibrium conditions. Depending on the mass transfer rate model you choose, they are used to compute either:

• w*, the loading that would be at equilibrium with the actual liquid phase composition

-or-

• c*, the liquid phase composition that would be at equilibrium with the actual loading.

This choice is automatically handled by Aspen Adsim depending on your selection of kinetic model.

The equilibrium variable arrays (of size number of nodes × number of components) are named either Ws or Cs. In bed models, these variables are distributed, so they have a qualifier 1, 2, n (=number of nodes), depending on the bed location.

Isotherm Tab (ionx): Isotherm Assumed for Layer In the Isotherm Assumed for Layer box, choose from:

• Mass Action Equilibrium

• Extended Langmuir

• Extended Langmuir-Freundlich

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (ionx): Mass Action Equilibrium

R R

B+ B+A+ +

R R

A++

B B

The exchange reaction in the ion-exchange process is typically takes the form:

mBARmBRA m +⇔+

where m is a stoichiometric coefficient.

• m is an integer or a fraction. It is given by the valence ratio of A and B.

• A refers to an ionic component in solution.

• B refers to a counter-ion on the ion-exchanger surface.

• R refers to a bound group (of opposite sign to B).

The associated equilibrium relationship can be written as:

1

0

1−

=

mm

B

B

A

A

AB cQ

yx

xy

K

Page 193: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 193

where:

ABK = Equilibrium constant or selectivity coefficient.

x = Equivalent mole fraction in the adsorbed phase.

y = Equivalent mole fraction in the aqueous phase.

0c = Total ionic concentration.

Q = Ion-exchange resin capacity.

In Aspen Adsim, the parameter 1IP equals ABK , and the parameter m equals

2IP . The equation now becomes:

0.11

01

22

=

−AA IPIP

B

B

A

AA c

Qyx

xyIP

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (ionx): Extended Langmuir

The extended Langmuir isotherm was found to represent some experimental data satisfactorily:

( ) bbk

kk

iii cIPcIP

cIPw

22

1

1 ++=

where b refers to the (original) counter-ion.

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (ionx): Extended Langmuir-Freundlich

This isotherm is based on the Langmuir isotherm and expressed as:

( ) bk

i

IPbb

k

IPkk

IPii

i cIPcIPcIP

w44

2

33

1

1 ++=

where b refers to the (original) counter-ion.

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (ionx): User Procedure

You can supply your own, proprietary isotherm relationships through a Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces using one of two procedures:

• pUser_i_Isotherm_C for solid film kinetic model

• pUser_i_Isotherm_W for liquid film kinetic model

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (ionx): User Submodel

With User Submodel selected, you supply the isotherm relationship through the user submodel iUserIsotherm.

Page 194: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 194

Summary of Mass Balance Equations for Ion-Exchange Processes This section summarizes the mass balance equations used by Aspen Adsim to simulate ion-exchange processes.

The overall material balance is expressed as:

0=+tz

v li

ll ∂

∂ρε∂∂ρ

This equation accounts for the fact that, during an ion-exchange cycle, solvents of different densities are being used in the different production, purge and regeneration stages. Density remains unchanged as a result of the ion-exchange process itself.

Each ionic species in the liquid phase, fed into the ion-exchange column, is governed by the following material balance equation:

02

2

=+++− kk

ik

lk

zi Jtc

zcv

zcE

∂∂ε

∂∂

∂∂ε

The mass transfer rate kJ between the bulk liquid and the resin is given by:

( )twJ k

ik ∂∂ε−= 1

where the uptake rate twk∂

∂ can, for example, be determined by a solid film

linear driving force relationship, such as:

( )kkskk wwMTCtw

−=∂

∂ *

The number of counter ions being released from the resin and entering the liquid phase is determined from the number of ions exchanged from the liquid phase the total charge of both liquid and resin must remain neutral:

∑≠=

=nc

bkk

kb JJ1

Hence the behavior of the exchanged counter ion in the liquid phase can be described by:

01

2

2

=−++− ∑≠=

nc

bkk

kb

ib

lb

zi Jtc

zcv

zcE

∂∂ε

∂∂

∂∂ε

Page 195: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 195

Explanation of Equation Symbols for Ion-Exchange Processes The tables explain the equation symbols used in Aspen Adsim's ion-exchange mass balance equations.

Symbol Explanation Aspen Adsim

base units

bc Counter ion concentration in liquid phase. eq/m3

kc Ion concentration in liquid phase. eq/m3

*kc Liquid phase ion concentration in equilibrium

with resin phase. eq/m3

0c Total liquid phase ion concentration. eq/m3

pd Resin particle diameter. m

zE Axial dispersion coefficient. m2/s

BH Bed height. m

IP Isotherm parameter.

bJ Counter ion material transfer rate. eq/m3/s

kJ Ion material transfer rate. eq/m3/s

ABK Mass action equilibrium constant.

m Stoichiometric coefficient used in mass action equilibrium.

lM Solvent molecular weight. kg/kmol

lMTC Liquid film mass transfer coefficient. 1/s

sMTC Solid film mass transfer coefficient. 1/s

Q Total resin ion capacity. eq/m3

t Time. s

kw Ion loading on resin. eq/m3

*kw Ion loading in equilibrium with liquid phase

ion concentration. eq/m3

kx Ion mole fraction in adsorbed (resin) phase.

ky Ion mole fraction in liquid phase.

z Axial co-ordinate. m

Page 196: Aspen Adsim

3 Ion-Exchange Processes 196

iε Bed voidage.

µ Solvent viscosity. N/m2/s

iρ Solvent molar density. kmol/m3

Dimensionless number

Defining expression Description

Pe

z

Bl

EHv

Peclet number

Re

µρ lPll vdM

Reynolds number

Page 197: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 197

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes

This chapter contains information on liquid adsorption processes and how they are simulated in Aspen Adsim. For more information, see the following topics:

• About Liquid Adsorption Processes

• Bed Model Assumptions for Liquid Adsorption

• Configure Form

• Configure Layer Form

• General Tab

• Material/Momentum Balance Tab

• Kinetic Model Tab

• About Adsorption Isotherms for Liquid Adsorption

• Guidelines for Choosing Aspen Adsim Isotherm Models

• Energy Balance Tab

• Procedures Tab

• Summary of Mass and Energy Balance

• Explanation of Equation Symbols

About Liquid Adsorption Processes Liquid phase adsorption has long been used to remove contaminants present at low concentrations in process streams, such as organics from waste water. When contaminants are not well defined, liquid phase adsorption can improve feed quality, defined by color, taste, odor, and storage stability.

Unlike trace impurity removal, using liquid phase adsorption for bulk separation on a commercial scale is a relatively recent development. The first commercial operation was in the 1960s, in hydrocarbon processing. Since then, bulk adsorptive separation of liquids has been used to solve a broad range of problems, including individual isomer separations and class separations. The commercial availability of synthetic molecular sieves and ion-exchange resins, and the development of novel process concepts have been the two significant factors in the success of these processes.

Page 198: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 198

Bed Model Assumptions for Liquid Adsorption For liquid adsorption, the bed model assumes:

• Plug flow, or plug flow with axial dispersion.

• The liquid phase pressure is either constant or varies according to a laminar-flow momentum balance (with the pressure drop assumed proportional to the flow velocity).

• The superficial velocity is constant, or varies due to adsorption and according to total mass balance.

• Molar concentrations are calculated from molar volumes. Ideal mixing is assumed to occur in the liquid phase, so molar volume is a linear function of composition.

• A lumped mass-transfer rate applies, with a liquid or solid-film resistance. This resistance is either linear, quadratic or user-defined.

• Mass transfer coefficients are either constant or user defined.

• The adsorption isotherm is chosen from Aspen Adsim defined isotherms, or specified by you.

• Isothermal or non-isothermal conditions apply. The energy balance includes terms for: − Thermal conductivity of gas and solid. − Liquid-solid heat transfer. − Heat of adsorption. − Enthalpy of adsorbed phase. − Heat exchange with environment. − Wall energy terms.

Configure Form (liq) This section contains information on the Configure form for a liquid process bed model. The following options are available:

• Enter the number of layers within the bed (one or more).

• Type a brief name or description in the Description box.

• Click the Configure button to open the Configure Layer dialog box.

• Click the Specify button to open the Specify form for the layer model.

Configure Layer Form (liq) Use the options in the Configure Layer form to define the set of equations for each layer of the adsorption bed.

For information on choosing the options for your liquid adsorption process, see the following sections:

• General Tab

• Material/Momentum Balance Tab

• Kinetic Model Tab

Page 199: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 199

• Isotherm Tab

• Energy Balance Tab

• Procedures Tab

General Tab (liq) Use the General tab to specify the numerical options for your liquid adsorption process.

General Tab (liq): Discretization Method to be Used These discretization methods are available for liquid adsorption processes:

• UDS1

• UDS2

• CDS1

• LDS

• QDS

• MIXED

• BUDS

General Tab (liq): Number of Nodes In the Number of Nodes box, choose an appropriate number of nodes for your discretization method.

Material/Momentum Balance (liq) Use the Material/Momentum Balance tab to:

• Make basic assumptions about axial dispersion in the liquid phase.

• Determine how to treat the pressure drop in the adsorption bed model.

• Specify whether the velocity is constant or varies along the column.

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (liq): Material Balance Assumption In the Material Balance Assumption box, choose the material balance option for your liquid adsorption process. Choose from:

• Convection Only

• Convection with Constant Dispersion

• Convection with Estimated Dispersion

• Convection with User Procedure Dispersion

• Convection with User Submodel Dispersion

Page 200: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 200

Material Balance Assumption (liq): Convection Only

The Convection Only option leaves out the dispersion term from the material balance for the bed. The model now represents plug flow with a zero dispersion coefficient (infinite Peclet number).

Because the dispersion term is omitted, you need not supply the dispersion coefficient.

Material Balance Assumption (liq): Convection with Constant Dispersion

The Convection with Constant Dispersion option includes the dispersion term in the material balance for the bed. You need to supply a constant value for the dispersion coefficient, zE .

With this option, the dispersion coefficient is constant for all components throughout the bed.

Material Balance Assumption (liq): Convection with Estimated Dispersion

The Convection with Estimated Dispersion option includes the dispersion term in the material balance for the bed.

With this option, the dispersion coefficient varies along the length of the bed. Aspen Adsim estimates the values during the simulation, for each component, using this correlation (Slater, 1991):

48.0011.02.0

+=

iiizi

ReErv Pl

εεεε

Where:

zE = Axial dispersion coefficient

lv = Liquid Velocity

iε = Interparticle voidage

pr = Particle radius

Re = Reynolds number

Material Balance Assumption (liq): Convection with User Procedure Dispersion

The Convection with User Procedure Dispersion option includes the dispersion term in the material balance for the bed.

With this option, the dispersion coefficient varies according to a user supplied Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces through the procedure type pUser_l_dispersion.

Page 201: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 201

Material Balance Assumption (liq): Convection with User Submodel Dispersion

The Convection with User Submodel Dispersion option includes the dispersion term in the material balance for the bed.

With this option, the dispersion coefficient varies according to the submodel lUserDispersion.

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (liq): Pressure Drop Assumption Use the Pressure Drop Assumption box to specify how Aspen Adsim treats the pressure drop in the adsorption bed model. You should base your choice on your knowledge of the actual operating conditions in the plant.

This option corresponds to how internal superficial velocities are related to local pressure gradients. It applies to laminar flow. You must choose an appropriate material balance model with a particular pressure-drop option.

In the Pressure Drop Assumption box, choose from these options:

• None

• Darcy's Law

• Karman-Kozeny

Pressure Drop Assumption (liq): None

With None selected, there is no pressure drop across the bed.

Pressure Drop Assumption (liq): Darcy's Law

Select the Darcy's Law option to apply a linear relationship between the liquid superficial velocity and the pressure gradient at a particular point in a bed.

Darcy's law states that the pressure drop is directly proportional to flow rate:

lPvKzp

−=∂∂

Where:

pK = Proportionality constant

Pressure Drop Assumption (liq): Karman-Kozeny

Select the Karman-Kozeny option to relate velocity to pressure drop:

( )( )

ψεµ

εψε

∂∂

p

i

il

ip

rvr

zp

21105.1

12 33 −×−

=−

Page 202: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 202

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (liq): Velocity Assumption In the Velocity Assumption box, choose from:

• Constant Velocity

• Varying Velocity

Velocity Assumption (liq): Constant Velocity

With Constant Velocity selected, the liquid velocity is constant along the bed, so adsorption from the liquid phase has a negligible effect on the material balance. These assumptions are valid only when modeling the removal of trace components from a bulk liquid.

Velocity Assumption (liq): Varying Velocity

With Varying Velocity selected, the superficial velocity varies along the bed according to the rate at which the liquid components are adsorbed onto the solid, or desorbed. The rate is determined from material balance.

This option is applicable to bulk separation applications.

If you select this option:

• The velocity profile is determined through the total material balance, by the effect of the rate of adsorption.

• The velocity profile is stored in the discrete variables Vl_in(1)Vl_in(n), where n is the number of nodes used in the numerical method.

Material/Momentum Balance Tab (liq): Overall Material Balance Assumption In the Overall Material Balance Assumption box, choose from:

• Constant Density

• Dynamic Density

Overall Material Balance Assumption (liq): Constant Density

With the Constant Density option, the mass density is constant along the bed. The velocity alone changes, and that according to the overall mass balance.

Overall Material Balance Assumption (liq): Dynamic Density

With Dynamic Density selected, mass density varies according to the material balance. Both mass density and velocity vary according to the overall mass balance.

Kinetic Model Tab (liq) When a species is adsorbed from the bulk liquid phase onto an active surface site of the adsorbents, it typically experiences the following mass transfer resistances:

Page 203: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 203

• The resistance between the bulk liquid and the external adsorbents surface.

• The resistance exerted by the adsorbents pore structure. For bi-disperse adsorbents (such as zeolites), this resistance can be further divided into: − Macropore resistance. − Micropore resistance.

These resistances are typically lumped into a single, overall mass transfer coefficient.

The following options are available from the Kinetic Model tab:

• Film Model Assumption

• Kinetic Model Assumption

• Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient

Kinetic Model Tab (liq): Film Model Assumption In the Film Model Assumption box, choose from:

• Solid the mass transfer driving force is expressed as a function of the solid phase loading.

• Fluid the mass transfer driving force is expressed as a function of the liquid phase concentration.

Kinetic Model Tab (liq): Kinetic Model Assumption In the Kinetic Model Assumption box, choose from:

• Linear lumped resistance.

• Quadratic lumped resistance.

• Micro and macropore.

• User procedure.

• User submodel.

Kinetic Model Assumption (liq): Linear Lumped Resistance

With Linear Lumped Resistance selected, the mass transfer driving force for component i is expressed as a linear function of the liquid phase concentration or solid phase loading.

( )*iili

iS ccMTCtw

−=∂

∂ρ (fluid)

( )iisii wwMTCtw

−= *

∂∂

(solid)

Page 204: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 204

Kinetic Model Assumption (liq): Quadratic Lumped Resistance

With Quadratic Lumped Resistance selected, the mass transfer driving force is expressed as a quadratic function of the liquid phase concentration or solid phase loading.

( )( )i

iiliiS c

ccMTCtw

2

2*2 −=

∂∂ρ (fluid)

( )( )i

iisi

i

wwwMTC

tw

2

22* −=

∂∂

(solid)

Kinetic Model Assumption (liq): Micro and Macropore Model

Two concentration gradients greatly affect the diffusion rate:

• Within the pores of the solid.

• Within the void spaces between the particles, that is, within the crystallines.

Under practical conditions in gas separation, pore diffusion limits the overall mass transfer rate between the bulk flow and the internal surface of a particle, so it is an important factor in the dynamics of adsorbers.

For more information, see Micro and Macro Pore Effects in Chapter 1.

Kinetic Model Assumption (liq): User Procedure

The User Procedure option relates the component rates of mass transfer to the local bed conditions through a user-supplied Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces through the procedure type pUser_l_Kinetic.

Kinetic Model Assumption (liq): User Submodel

With User Submodel selected, the bed model calls the submodel lUserKinetic. This submodel needs the relationship between the component rates of mass transfer and the local bed conditions.

Kinetic Model Tab (liq): Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient In the Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient box, you choose how mass transfer coefficients are defined. Choose from:

• Constant

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient (liq): Constant

With Constant selected, the mass transfer coefficient for each component is constant through the bed. You must supply a constant value of mass transfer coefficient for each component.

Page 205: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 205

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient (liq): User Procedure

If you choose User Procedure, the mass transfer coefficients are returned by a Fortran subroutine you supply, which Aspen Adsim interfaces through the procedure pUser_l_MTC.

Form of Mass Transfer Coefficient (liq): User Submodel

With User Submodel selected, the mass transfer coefficients are defined in the user submodel lUserMTC.

About Adsorption Isotherms for Liquid Adsorption The driving force behind all adsorptive liquid separation processes is the departure from adsorption equilibrium, so adsorption isotherms are important data in adsorber design.

If you know the adsorption isotherms for the components of the feed, you can create a bed model to predict the performance of the adsorber bed for the specified operating conditions.

Aspen Adsim has a comprehensive list of multicomponent adsorption isotherms.

Guidelines for Choosing Aspen Adsim Isotherm Models Make sure you choose a model that is appropriate for the process you are investigating. The equilibrium specified by the isotherm model affects the driving force for mass transfer. Consequently, you can obtain significantly different simulation results when using different models, even if the model parameters come from the same set of data.

The expressions in this section are equilibrium equations. Depending on the mass transfer rate model you choose (See also Kinetic Model Tab (liq) on page 4-202), the expressions are used to compute either:

• w* The loading that would be at equilibrium with the actual liquid phase composition

-or-

• c* The liquid phase composition that would be at equilibrium with the actual loading.

This choice is automatically handled by Aspen Adsim.

The equilibrium variable arrays (of size n) are named either Ws or Cs. In bed models, these variables are distributed, so they have a qualifier 1, 2, ... n, to denote their location in the bed.

Page 206: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 206

The Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory (IAS) Recently, the Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory (IAS) has become popular for multicomponent mixtures. The method lets you predict adsorption equilibria for components in a mixture. It needs data only for the pure-component adsorption equilibria at the same temperature, and on the same adsorbent.

The model treats the mixed adsorbate phase as an ideal solution in equilibrium with the liquid phase. The model follows the formal, thermodynamic approach for vapor-liquid equilibria, in which the fundamental equations of thermodynamic equilibrium are developed, and applies this to the liquid-adsorbed phase equilibria.

At first sight, ideal behavior in the adsorbed phase seems improbable. However, many systems have shown strong correlation between experimental data and predictions by IAS theory, including binary and ternary mixtures on activated carbons and zeolites.

IAS is available in Aspen Adsim. To use it, choose the appropriate isotherm on the Isotherm tab of the Configure Layer form. For a full description of the IAS approach, see Chapter 4 of Ruthven (1984) or Chapter 3 of Kast (1988) (German language).

Isotherm Tab (liq): Isotherm Assumed for Layer Use the Isotherm tab to choose which adsorption isotherms are used in your liquid adsorption process. Choose from:

• Langmuir models (1,2)

• Dual-Site Langmuir models (1,2

• Extended Langmuir models (1,2)

• Freundlich models (1,2)

• Langmuir-Freundlich models (1,2)

• Extended Langmuir-Freundlich models (1,2)

• Stoichiometric Equilibrium models (1,2)

• IAS Langmuir models (1,2)

• IAS Freundlich models (1,2)

• IAS Langmuir-Freundlich models (1,2)

• User Multicomponent Procedure

• User Multicomponent Submodel

• User Multicomponent Procedure with IAS

• User Multicomponent Submodel with IAS

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): Langmuir Models (1,2)

There are two types of Langmuir model available in Aspen Adsim:

• Langmuir 1, which is temperature independent.

• Langmuir 2, which is temperature dependent.

Page 207: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 207

Langmuir 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

ii

iiii cIP

cIPIPw

2

21

1+=

Langmuir 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

is

ii

is

iii

i

cTIP

IP

cTIP

IPIPw

+

=3

2

321

exp1

exp

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): Dual-Site Langmuir Models (1,2)

There are two types of Dual-Site Langmuir model available in Aspen Adsim:

• Dual-Site Langmuir 1, which is temperature independent.

• Dual-Site Langmuir 2, which is temperature dependent.

Dual-Site Langmuir 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

∑∑==

++

+= nc

kkk

iiinc

kkk

iiii

cIP

cIPIP

cIP

cIPIPw

14

43

12

21

11

Dual-Site Langmuir 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

∑∑==

+

+

+

=nc

kk

s

kk

is

iii

nc

kk

s

kk

is

iii

i

cTIPIP

cTIPIPIP

cTIPIP

cTIPIPIP

w

1

65

654

1

32

321

exp1

exp

exp1

exp

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): Extended Langmuir Models (1,2)

Aspen Adsim has two types of Extended Langmuir model:

• Extended Langmuir 1, which is temperature independent.

• Extended Langmuir 2, which is temperature dependent.

Extended Langmuir 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

Page 208: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 208

∑=

+= nc

kkk

iiii

cIP

cIPIPw

12

21

1

Extended Langmuir 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

∑=

+

=nc

kk

s

kk

is

iii

i

cTIPIP

cTIPIPIP

w

1

32

321

exp1

exp

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): Freundlich Models (1,2)

There are two types of Freundlich model available in Aspen Adsim:

• Freundlich 1, which is temperature independent.

• Freundlich 2, which is temperature dependent.

Freundlich 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

iIPiii cIPw 2

1=

Freundlich 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

=

s

iIPiii T

IPcIPw i 3

1 exp2

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): Langmuir-Freundlich Models (1,2)

There are two types of Langmuir-Freundlich model available in Aspen Adsim:

• Langmuir-Freundlich 1, which is temperature independent.

• Langmuir-Freundlich 2, which is temperature dependent.

Langmuir-Freundlich 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

i

i

IPii

IPiii

i cIPcIPIP

w3

3

2

21

1+=

Langmuir-Freundlich 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

Page 209: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 209

+

=

s

iIPii

s

iIPiii

i

TIP

cIP

TIP

cIPIPw

i

i

42

421

exp1

exp

3

3

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): Extended Langmuir-Freundlich Models (1,2)

There are two types of Extended Langmuir-Freundlich model available in Aspen Adsim:

• Extended Langmuir-Freundlich 1, which is temperature independent.

• Extended Langmuir-Freundlich 2, which is temperature dependent.

Extended Langmuir-Freundlich 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

( )∑=

+= n

j

IPjj

IPiii

ij

i

cIP

cIPIPw

12

21

3

3

1

Extended Langmuir-Freundlich 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

∑=

+

=n

j s

jIPjj

s

iIPiii

i

TIP

cIP

TIPcIPIP

wj

i

1

42

421

exp1

exp

3

3

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): Stoichiometric Equilibrium Models (1,2)

Aspen Adsim has two types of Stoichiometric Equilibrium model:

• Stoichiometric Equilibrium 1, which is temperature independent.

• Stoichiometric Equilibrium 2, which is temperature dependent.

Stoichiometric Equilibrium 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

∑=

= nc

kkk

iiii

cIP

cIPIPw

12

21

Stoichiometric Equilibrium 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

Page 210: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 210

∑=

=nc

kk

s

kk

is

iii

i

cTIPIP

cTIPIPIP

w

1

32

321

exp

exp

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): IAS Langmuir Models (1,2)

With IAS Langmuir Models selected, the multicomponent adsorption behavior is expressed using Ideal Adsorbed Solution theory in combination with pure component isotherms. Aspen Adsim has two versions of the pure component Langmuir model:

• IAS Langmuir 1, which is temperature independent.

• IAS Langmuir 2, which is temperature dependent.

IAS Langmuir 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

ii

iiii cIP

cIPIPw2

21

1+=

IAS Langmuir 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

is

ii

is

iii

i

cTIPIP

cTIPIPIP

w

+

=3

2

321

exp1

exp

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): IAS Freundlich Models (1,2)

With IAS Freundlich Models selected, the multicomponent adsorption behavior is expressed using the Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory in combination with pure component isotherms. Aspen Adsim has two versions of the pure component Freundlich model:

• IAS Freundlich 1, which is temperature independent.

• IAS Freundlich 2, which is temperature dependent.

IAS Freundlich 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

iIPiii cIPw 2

1=

IAS Freundlich 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

Page 211: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 211

=

s

iIPiii T

IPcIPw i 3

1 exp2

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): IAS Langmuir-Freundlich Models (1,2)

With IAS Langmuir-Freundlich selected, the multicomponent adsorption behavior is expressed using the Ideal Adsorbed Solution Theory in combination with pure component isotherms. Aspen Adsim has two versions of the pure component Langmuir-Freundlich model:

• IAS Langmuir-Freundlich 1, which is temperature independent.

• IAS Langmuir-Freundlich 2, which is temperature dependent.

IAS Langmuir-Freundlich 1

This isotherm is expressed as:

i

i

IPii

IPiii

i cIPcIPIPw

3

3

2

21

1+=

IAS Langmuir-Freundlich 2

This isotherm is expressed as:

+

=

s

iIPii

s

iIPiii

i

TIPcIP

TIPcIPIP

wi

i

42

421

exp1

exp

3

3

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): User Multicomponent Procedure

You can supply your own, proprietary isotherm relationships through a Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces using one of two procedures:

• pUser_l_Isotherm_C for solid film kinetic model

• pUser_l_Isotherm_W for liquid film kinetic model

The functional relationship is:

( )IPccTfw nceqi ,..., 1=

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): User Multicomponent Submodel

You can supply your own, proprietary isotherm relationships using the submodel lUserIsotherm.

The functional relationship is:

( )IPccTfw nceqi ,..., 1=

Page 212: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 212

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): User Purecomponent Procedure with IAS

Select the User Purecomponent Procedure with IAS option to supply pure component, user-specified isotherms, which may be used as multicomponent isotherms. In this case, two Fortran subroutines are needed:

The first subroutine is interfaced by the procedure type pUser_l_Isotherm_W.

This relates the fictitious pure component concentration 0ic (resulting in the

same spread pressure as the mixture at total concentration totc ), to the

loading 0iw , using the pure component isotherm:

( )IPcTfw ieqi ,, 00 =

The second Fortran subroutine evaluates the integral of the Gibbs isotherm to give the spread pressure. It is interfaced by the procedure type pUser_l_Gibbs. The relationship to be evaluated is:

( ) ( )∫==

0

0

00 ,,

,,ic

eqi

i dccIPcTf

gIPcTgRTA withΠ

Isotherm Assumed for Layer (liq): User Purecomponent Submodel with IAS

Select this option to supply pure component, user-specified isotherms, which may be used as multicomponent isotherms. In this case, you must supply two submodels:

The first submodel is lUserIsotherm. This relates the fictitious pure

component concentration 0ic (resulting in the same spread pressure as the

mixture at total concentration totc ), to the loading 0iw , using a pure

component isotherm:

( )IPcTfw ieqi ,, 00 =

The second submodel, lUserGibbs, evaluates the integral of the Gibbs isotherm to give the spread pressure. The relationship to be evaluated is:

( ) ( )∫==

0

0

00 ,,

,,ic

eqi

i dccIPcTf

gIPcTgRTA withΠ

Energy Balance Tab (liq) Use the Energy Balance tab to specify how the energy balance is incorporated into the model.

Energy Balance Tab (liq): Energy Balance Assumption In the Energy Balance Assumption box, choose from the following options:

Page 213: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 213

• Isothermal

• Non-Isothermal with no Conduction

• Non-Isothermal with Fluid Conduction

• Non-Isothermal with Solid Conduction

• Non-Isothermal with Fluid and Solid Conduction

Energy Balance Assumption (liq): Isothermal

The Isothermal option ignores the energy balance. Fluid and solid temperatures are set to the same, constant value.

Energy Balance Assumption (liq): Non-Isothermal with No Conduction

The Non-Isothermal with No Conduction option ignores the axial thermal conduction for the fluid and solid phases within the energy balance.

Energy Balance Assumption (liq): Non-Isothermal with Fluid Conduction

The Non-Isothermal with Fluid Conduction option includes the thermal conduction (axial thermal dispersion) term in the fluid energy balance.

This term is represented as:

2

2

zTk l

l ∂∂

The liquid phase thermal conductivity can be supplied in different ways as specified in the section Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity.

Energy Balance Assumption (liq): Non-Isothermal with Solid Conduction

The Non-Isothermal with Solid Conduction option includes the thermal conduction term in the solid energy balance. The solid thermal conduction term is represented as:

2

2

zTk S

S ∂∂

You must supply a value for sk .

Energy Balance Assumption (liq): Non-Isothermal with Fluid and Solid Conduction

The Non-Isothermal with Fluid and Solid Conduction option includes the thermal conduction term for both fluid and solid phases.

The liquid phase thermal conductivity can be supplied in different ways, as specified in the section Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity field.

Page 214: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 214

Energy Balance Tab (liq): Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase Aspen Adsim models enable you to include the heat capacity of the adsorbed phase in the solid-phase energy balance. The Heat of Adsorbed Phase term is optional.

In the Consider Heat of Adsorbed Phase box, select from No or Yes:

• No Choose this option to ignore the enthalpy of the adsorbed phase term in the solid phase energy balance.

• Yes Choose this option if the enthalpy content of the adsorbed phase is significant for your process, and you want to include it in the overall energy balance.

The term for each component is a function of the loading and the temperature in the solid phase:

tTwCH S

iPipiads ∂∂

= ρ,

The total contribution is the sum for all components: ∑=

nc

iiadsH

1,

Energy Balance Tab (liq): Heat of Adsorption Assumption If the solid-phase energy balance is significant for the process, you must include the heat of adsorption within the balance. The rate of heat generation by adsorption of each component i, per unit mass of solid, is a function of the local rate of mass transfer and the heat of adsorption:

ii

i HtwHT ∆∂

∂=

These rates are held in vectors and summed for all components to obtain the total rate of heat generation, by adsorption, per unit volume of solid:

( )∑=

nc

iip HT

In the Heat of Adsorption Assumption box, choose from:

• None

• Constant

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Heat of Adsorption Assumption (liq): None

The heat generation by adsorption term is omitted from the energy balance.

Page 215: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 215

Heat of Adsorption Assumption (liq): Constant

The Constant option assumes the heat of adsorption is constant for each component i. Choose this option to set the heat of adsorption to constant values. These are held in a vector called DH. You must provide the values of the elements of DH.

Heat of Adsorption Assumption (liq): User Procedure

With User Procedure selected, the heat of adsorption comes from a user-supplied Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces using the procedure pUser_l_DH. You can vary the heat of adsorption and make it a function of, for example, local loading, temperature, and pressure. In general terms:

),,( wPTfH s=∆

Heat of Adsorption Assumption (liq): User Submodel

With User Submodel selected, the heat of adsorption comes from the user submodel lUserDH. You can vary the heat of adsorption and make it a function of, for example, local loading, temperature, and pressure. In general terms:

),,( wPTfH s=∆

Energy Balance Tab (liq): Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient If you request a non-isothermal energy balance, Aspen Adsim generates the solid and fluid phase energy balances, using a film resistance due to heat transfer between the solid and the fluid. Heat transfer is assumed to occur between the two phases according to:

Rate of heat transferred per unit volume of bed ( ) ( )SliP TTHTCa −−= ε1

If there is no heat transfer resistance between the solid and fluid, the temperature of the fluid and solid are equal (lumped). To obtain this condition, set the heat transfer coefficient to a very large value (such as 1MW/m2/K).

In the Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient box, choose from:

• Constant

• Estimated

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient (liq): Constant

Choose Constant to ensure the heat transfer coefficient has a single value, which is held in a variable called HTC.

Page 216: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 216

Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient (liq): Estimated

The heat transfer coefficient is estimated as follows:

1 Calculate the Reynolds number:

µρ llp vMr

Re2

=

If the calculated value falls below 1E-10, reset it to this value.

2 Calculate the Prandl number:

MkC

Prl

plµ=

If the calculated value falls below 1E-10, reset it to this value.

3 Calculate the j-factor:

If Re < 190 then 51.066.1 −= Rej otherwise 41.0983.0 −= Rej

4 Calculate the heat transfer coefficient:

32

Pr−= llplvCjHTC ρ

If the calculated value falls below 1E-10, reset it to a value of 1.

Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient (liq): User Procedure

With the User Procedure option, the user procedure pUser_l_HTC relates the local heat transfer coefficient to the state of the bed at a particular point in the bed. This means you can interface your own Fortran code to calculate the coefficients.

In general terms:

( )ll vCPTfHTC ,,,=

Form of Heat Transfer Coefficient (liq): User Submodel

With User Submodel selected, the local heat transfer coefficient is defined through the user submodel lUserHTC.

Energy Balance Tab (liq): Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity If you selected Non-isothermal with Fluid and/or Solid Conduction, you need to choose the form of fluid thermal conductivity .

In the Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity box, choose from:

• Constant

• Based on Axial Dispersion

• User Procedure

• User Submodel

Page 217: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 217

Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity (liq): Constant

The thermal conductivity has a constant value, which you set.

Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity (liq): Based on Axial Dispersion

With Based on Axial Dispersion selected, the thermal conductivity coefficient is calculated as the product of the molar heat capacity of the fluid, the axial dispersion coefficient and the molar density of the fluid:

lzPll ECk ρ=

This method applies the analogy between heat and mass transfer.

Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity (liq): User Procedure

With User Procedure selected, thermal conductivity varies axially along the bed and is defined in a user-defined Fortran subroutine, which Aspen Adsim interfaces using the procedure pUser_l_Kl.

Form of Fluid Thermal Conductivity (liq): User Submodel

With User Submodel selected, thermal conductivity varies axially along the bed and is defined in the user submodel lUserKl.

Energy Balance Tab (liq): Heat Transfer to Environment In the Heat Transfer to Environment box, choose from:

• Adiabatic

• Thin Wall

• Rigorous Model

• Heat Exchange between Fluid and Wall

• Heat Exchange between Wall and Environment

• Axial Conductivity along the Wall

• Heat Content of Wall

Heat Transfer to Environment (liq): Adiabatic

With Adiabatic selected, there is no heat transfer between the bed and the wall.

Heat Transfer to Environment (liq): Thin Wall

With the Thin Wall option, the fluid phase energy balance includes the heat exchange between the fluid in the bed and the environment:

( )amblB

w TTDH

−4

Page 218: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 218

Heat Transfer to Environment (liq): Rigorous Model

With Rigorous Model selected, the bed model applies a wall energy balance equation that contains the following terms:

• Heat transfer from the fluid in the bed to the inner wall.

• Heat transfer from the outer wall to the environment.

• Axial thermal conduction along the wall.

• Heat accumulation within the wall material.

The wall is assumed to be thin and conductive enough for the inner and outer wall temperatures to be equal. The adiabatic option (that is, ignoring the wall energy balance) is valid only when the wall is non-conductive, or there is an infinite heat transfer resistance between the liquid and the wall surface.

Heat Transfer to Environment (liq): Heat Exchange Between Fluid and Wall

When the rigorous wall energy balance is selected, the heat exchange between the fluid in the bed and the inner surface of the wall is included in the wall energy balance.

The term is represented as:

( )wlwiwo

wiw TT

DDDH −− 22

4

You must define the value of the liquid-to-wall heat transfer coefficient, wH .

The heat exchange between fluid and wall is also included in the fluid phase energy balance. Note that the equation has a slightly different form, owing to the different cross-sectional areas of the balances:

( )wlwi

w TTD

H −4

Heat Transfer to Environment (liq): Heat Exchange Between Wall and Environment

When a rigorous wall energy balance is included, the heat transfer between the outer wall and the environment is expressed as:

( )ambwwiwo

woamb TT

DDDH −− 22

4

You must define the value of the heat transfer coefficient to the environment

ambH and the temperature of the environment, ambT . To ignore the effect of

heat exchange with the environment in the energy balance, set the value of the heat transfer coefficient to zero.

Heat Transfer to Environment (liq): Axial Thermal Conductivity Along Wall

The axial thermal conduction along the wall is always included in the wall energy balance. The term is:

Page 219: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 219

2

2

zTk w

w ∂∂

You must specify the thermal conductivity of the wall material, wk .

Heat Transfer to Environment (liq): Heat Content of Wall

The heat accumulation of the wall is always included in the wall energy balance. The term is:

tTC w

pww ∂∂ρ

You must specify the value of the wall density, wρ , and the specific heat

capacity of the wall, pwC .

Procedures Tab (liq) Use the Procedures tab to view a list of the user procedures being used within the current adsorption layer model.

Liquid Adsorption: Summary of Mass and Energy Balance For information on the equations used in Aspen Adsim for mass and energy balances in liquid adsorption processes, see:

• Liquid Adsorption: Mass Balance

• Liquid Adsorption: Solid Phase Energy Balance

• Liquid Adsorption: Fluid Phase Energy Balance

• Liquid Adsorption: Wall Energy Balance

Liquid Adsorption: Mass Balance The overall mass balance for a multi-component liquid phase contains terms for:

• Convection of material.

• Accumulation of material in the liquid phase.

• Mass transfer from the liquid to the solid phase.

The governing partial differential equation is:

( ) 01

=

∂∂

+∂∂

+∂

∂ ∑=

nc

i

iisMll

Mli t

wMvzt

ρρρε

Each component in the liquid phase is governed by a material balance:

( ) 02

2

=∂

∂+

∂∂

+∂∂

+∂∂

−tw

tccv

zzcE i

si

iili

zi ρεε

Page 220: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 220

Liquid Adsorption: Solid Phase Energy Balance The solid phase energy balance includes terms for:

• Thermal conduction.

• Accumulation of heat.

• Accumulation of heat in the adsorbed phase.

• Heat of adsorption.

• Gas-solid heat transfer (expressed in terms of a film resistance where the heat transfer area is proportional to the area of the adsorbent particles).

The solid phase energy balance is given as:

( ) ( )∑∑==

=−−

+++−

nc

islp

iip

nc

iipli

sp

spsp

ss TTHTCa

twHwC

tT

tTC

zTk

112

2

0∂

∂∆ρ∂

∂ρ∂

∂ρ∂

Liquid Adsorption: Fluid Phase Energy Balance The fluid phase energy balance includes terms for:

• Thermal conduction.

• Convection of energy.

• Accumulation of heat, heat transfer from fluid to solid.

• Heat transfer from fluid to the internal wall.

The governing partial differential equation is:

( ) ( ) ( ) 0412

2

=−+−−+∂∂

+∂∂

+∂∂

− wlwi

wslip

llpli

lllpl

lil TT

DHTTHTCa

tTC

zTvC

zTk ερερε

Liquid Adsorption: Wall Energy Balance The wall energy balance includes terms for:

• Axial thermal conduction along the wall.

• Heat accumulation within the wall material.

• Heat transfer from the bed to the inner wall.

• Heat transfer from the outer wall to the environment.

The governing partial differential equation is:

( ) ( ) 04422222

2

=−−

+−−

−∂

∂+

∂∂

− ambwwiwo

woambwl

wiwo

wiw

wpww

ww TT

DDDHTT

DDDH

tTC

zTk ρ

Page 221: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 221

Liquid Adsorption: Explanation of Equation Symbols Symbol Explanation Aspen Adsim base units

pa Specific particle surface. m2/m3

A Area. m2

kc Molar concentration of component k. kmol/m3

0ic

IAS pure component concentration. kmol/m3

plC Specific liquid phase heat capacity. MJ/kmol/K

psC Specific heat capacity of adsorbent. MJ/kmol/K

pWC Specific heat capacity of column wall. MJ/kg/K

BD Bed diameter. m

wiD Inner bed diameter. m

woD Outer bed diameter. m

zE Axial dispersion coefficient. m2/s

eqf Equilibrium (isotherm) relationship. -

g Function. -

iadsH , Heat of component i in adsorbed phase. MJ/m3/s

ambH Wall-ambient heat transfer coefficient. MW/m2/K

BH Height of adsorbent layer. m

iHT Heat of adsorption contribution to solid phase energy balance.

MJ/m3/s

wH Gas-wall heat transfer coefficient. MJ/m2/s

iH∆ Heat of adsorption of component i. MJ/kmol

HTC Liquid-solid heat transfer coefficient. MJ/m2/s

IP Isotherm parameter, units depend on isotherm.

j Colburn j-factor for heat or mass transfer. -

lk Liquid phase thermal conductivity. MW/m/K

sk Solid thermal conductivity. MW/m/K

Page 222: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 222

PK Darcys constant. bar s/m2

M Molecular weight. kg/kmol

lMTC Liquid film mass transfer coefficient. 1/s

sMTC Solid film mass transfer coefficient. 1/s

p Pressure. bar

pr Particle radius. m

R Universal gas constant. bar m3/kmol/K

t Time. s

T Temperature. K

ambT Ambient temperature. K

sT Solid phase temperature. K

lT Liquid phase temperature. K

WT Wall temperature. K

lv Liquid phase superficial velocity. m/s

kw Loading. kmol/kg

0kw

Pure component loading of component k. kmol/kg

W Width of horizontal bed. m

TW Width of column wall. m

z Axial co-ordinate. m

Symbol Explanation Aspen Adsim base units

iε Interparticle voidage. m3 (Void)/m3 (Bed)

µ Dynamic viscosity. N s/m2

0iΠ

Spreading pressure of component i. bar m

IM ,ρ Liquid phase mass density. kg/m3

lρ Liquid phase molar density. kmol/m3

pρ Adsorbent apparent density. kg/m3

sρ Adsorbent bulk density. kg/m3

Wρ Wall density. kg/m3

Page 223: Aspen Adsim

4 Liquid Adsorption Processes 223

Ψ Particle shape factor. -

Dimensionless number Defining expression Description

Pe

z

bl

EHv

Peclet number for mass transfer.

Pr

MkC

l

plµ Prandl number.

Re

µρ llMp vr ,2 Particle Reynolds number.

Page 224: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 224

5 Numerical Methods

This chapter describes the numerical methods available in Aspen Adsim to solve its partial differential equations.

See these topics for more information:

• About Numerical Methods

• Choosing the Discretization Method

• About the Discretization Methods

About Numerical Methods Aspen Adsim uses a set of partial differential equations (PDEs), ordinary differential equations (ODEs) and algebraic equations, together with the appropriate initial and boundary conditions, to fully describe the adsorption or ion-exchange column.

Spatial derivatives are discretized using algebraic approximations, and a set of ordinary differential equations and algebraic equations (DAEs) results.

The spatial derivative terms within the partial differential equations are first- or second-order derivatives of some distributed variable, such as concentration, temperature or molar flux.

The approximations are defined over a fixed, uniform grid of points (nodes); the distributed variables are defined for each node by means of variable sets. The resulting system of differential and algebraic equations must be solved simultaneously since they are coupled. In a sense, the dependent variables at each node march in time along parallel lines perpendicular to the spatial axis, which explains the commonly-used name for this solution technique: the numerical method of lines.

The first-order spatial derivatives present the greatest challenge in providing numerically accurate and stable approximations, particularly when the system of equations is highly nonlinear a common occurrence in adsorption process simulation. A typical problem is the propagation of steep discontinuities known as fronts or shocks. The failure of approximations to adequately represent the first order derivatives is manifested by two unwanted and spurious effects:

• Numerical diffusion leading to excessive smearing of the solution.

• Numerical oscillations, leading to non-physical solutions and the violation of physical bounds.

Page 225: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 225

This chapter describes the methods available in Aspen Adsim to approximate first-order spatial derivatives, showing where the methods come from and how they are evaluated.

Choosing the Discretization Method Your choice of discretization method depends chiefly on the type of process you are simulating, and the level of accuracy, stability and speed you are looking for.

Each of the numerical methods differ in:

• Method of approximation of spatial derivatives.

• Number of points.

• Accuracy (including any tendency towards oscillatory behavior).

• Stability.

• Simulation time required.

The three best standard methods, in terms of accuracy, stability, and simulation time are:

• Upwind Differencing Scheme 1.

• Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme.

• Mixed Differencing Scheme.

The Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme and the Flux Limiter are recommended in cases where the system is highly nonlinear and breakthrough curves are very steep features associated with highly nonlinear adsorption isotherms and near-equilibrium behavior. The Flux Limiter technique gives the accuracy of a higher order technique, but with no oscillations at small node counts.

Note that all second-order derivatives are approximated by a second-order accurate central difference scheme, which is known to be accurate, stable, and fast for all cases of interest.

For details on the integration of the resulting system of differential equations with time, see the Aspen Custom Modeler Solver Options help.

About the Discretization Methods To specify a discretization method:

• On the General tab, in the Discretization Method to Be Used box, select the method you require.

Page 226: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 226

Choose from these options:

• Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 (UDS1, first order)

• Upwind Differencing Scheme 2 (UDS2, second order)

• Central Differencing Scheme 1 (CDS1, second order)

• Central Differencing Scheme 2 (CDS2, fourth order)

• Leonard Differencing Scheme (LDS, third order)

• Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme (QDS, third order)

• Mixed Differencing Scheme (MDS, ~third order)

• Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme (BUDS, fourth order)

• Fromms scheme (FROMM, third order)

• Flux limited discretization scheme (Flux limiter)

If you choose the Flux limited discretization scheme, you need to select one of these suboptions:

• OSPRE

• SMART

• van Leer

With schemes of higher order than UDS1 (first order), the bounds for some variable types need modifying. This is because higher order methods that are not flux limited tend to oscillate, so may return negative values for variables types with a lower bound of zero. The typical changes required are:

Variable type Action normally required

g_Conc_Mol l_Conc_Mol i_Conc_Eq

Set the lower bound to minus the upper bound.

g_Loading l_Loading

Set the lower bound to minus the upper bound.

Page 227: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 227

i_Loading_Eq

Molefraction Widen the upper bound to 2, and set the lower bound to minus the new upper bound.

Fraction Widen the upper bound to 2, and set the lower bound to minus the new upper bound.

Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 (UDS1) is the preferred option because it is:

• Good all-round performer.

• Unconditionally non-oscillatory.

• Unconditionally stable.

• Cheapest user of simulation time.

• Reasonably accurate.

You increase accuracy by increasing the number of nodes. If you need greater accuracy with a minimal increase in simulation time, use the Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme. For Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 to achieve the same level of accuracy, the number of nodes has to be increased by a factor of two through four, leading to a similar increase in simulation time.

In most cases, use Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 first.

Derivation of Upwind Differencing Scheme 1

Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 is a first-order upwind differencing scheme, based on a first-order Taylor expansion.

First-order (convection) term:

zziii

∆ΓΓ

∂Γ∂ 1−−

=

Second-order (dispersion) term is approximated with a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Evaluation of Upwind Differencing Scheme 1

Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 has the following advantages (+) and disadvantages ():

+ Unconditionally stable (that is, it does not produce oscillations in the solution).

+ Least simulation time.

Only first-order accurate.

Gives a large amount of so-called false or numerical diffusion. (However, this problem decreases as the number of nodes is increased.)

Page 228: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 228

Upwind Differencing Scheme 2 The Upwind Differencing Scheme 2 (UDS2) option predicts sharper fronts than Upwind Differencing Scheme 1, but the solution tends to oscillate.

Derivation of Upwind Differencing Scheme 2

Upwind Differencing Scheme 2 is a second-order upwind differencing scheme.

The first-order (convection) term:

zziiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂

243 21 −− +−

=

Second-order (dispersion) term is approximated with a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Evaluation of Upwind Differencing Scheme 2

Upwind Differencing Scheme 2 has the following advantages (+)and disadvantages ():

+ Second-order accuracy (because it includes a higher order derivative than first-order upwind schemes).

May produce some numerical oscillations.

Central Differencing Scheme 1 Central Differencing Schemes 1 and 2 (CDS1 and 2) may be used if you choose to include axial dispersion in the problem. They give good accuracy with a reasonable CPU time requirement.

In a series of test problems, Central Differencing Scheme 1 used less CPU time than Central Differencing Scheme 2, but produced greater oscillations.

Derivation of Central Differencing Scheme 1

Central Differencing Scheme 1 is a second-order central differencing scheme and takes the form:

First-order convective term:

∂Γ∂z z

i i=−+ −Γ Γ∆

1 1

2

Second-order (dispersion) term is approximated with a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Page 229: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 229

Evaluation of Central Differencing Scheme 1

Central Differencing Scheme 1 has the following advantages (+) and disadvantages ():

+ Second-order accurate.

Numerical instabilities.

To overcome these instabilities, include axial dispersion in the bed model. This may cause errors in simulation if there is little axial dispersion in the beds, but these errors are no more inconvenient than the false diffusion associated with upwind differencing.

Using Central Differencing Scheme 1 with axial dispersion may reduce the number of nodes in the grid, allowing smaller simulation times.

Central Differencing Scheme 2 Central Differencing Schemes 1 and 2 (CDS1 and 2) are useful if you choose to include axial dispersion in the problem. They can give good accuracy with a reasonable CPU time requirement.

In a series of test problems, Central Differencing Scheme 2 produced smaller oscillations than Central Differencing Scheme 1, but used more CPU time.

Derivation of Central Differencing Scheme 2

Central Differencing Scheme 2 is a second-order central differencing scheme and takes the form:

First-order derivative:

zziiiii

∆ΓΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂

1288 1112 −−++ +−+−

=

Second-order (dispersion) term is approximated with a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Evaluation of Central Differencing Scheme 2

Central Differencing Scheme 2 has the following advantages (+)and disadvantages ():

+ Third-order accurate.

Requires increased CPU time.

Leonard Differencing Scheme The Leonard Differencing Scheme (LDS) is comparable with the Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme:

• Gives the same instability problems.

• Less accurate.

Page 230: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 230

• Requires less CPU time.

Derivation of Leonard Differencing Scheme

The Leonard Differencing Scheme is a linear combination of the Central Differencing Scheme 1 scheme and a second-order, four point finite differencing scheme. This combination yields:

First-order derivative:

zziiii

∆ΓΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂

6632 211 −−+ +−+

=

Second-order (dispersion) term is approximated with a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Evaluation of Leonard Differencing Scheme

The Leonard Differencing Scheme has the following advantages (+) and disadvantages ():

+ Accurate.

Known to produce oscillations under convective conditions.

Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme If you need greater accuracy than the Leonard Differencing Scheme, with a minimal increase in simulation time, use the Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme (QDS).

The Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme is the most accurate of all the methods for the same number of points.

Derivation of Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme

The Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme is based on quadratic interpolation, as opposed to the linear interpolation typical of many other schemes.

First-order derivative:

zziiiii

∆ΓΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂

8733 211 −−+ +−+

=

Second-order (dispersion) term is approximated with a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

The scheme is also referred to as QUICK (Quadratic Upstream Interpolation for Convective Kinematics).

Page 231: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 231

Evaluation of Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme

The Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme has the following advantages (+) and disadvantages ():

+ Very accurate.

+ Little numerical dispersion.

+ Well suited to explicit (time) integration.

Oscillates under highly convective conditions.

Advantages of Quadratic Differencing Scheme: Example

Both the Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme and the Mixed Differencing Scheme are more accurate than Upwind Differencing Scheme 1. They both use about the same simulation time, which is typically about 25% more than Upwind Differencing Scheme 1.

For Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 to achieve the same level of accuracy, you must increase the number of nodes for Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 by a factor of two through four, leading to an equivalent increase in simulation time.

Aspen Adsim Breakthrough Plot

Page 232: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 232

In this breakthrough plot, both the Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme and the Mixed Differencing Scheme have 20 nodes. Initially, Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 also had 20 nodes, which caused high numerical diffusion.

The number of nodes in Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 is increased first to 50 and then to 100, to reduce this diffusion. The cost of this is increased simulation time for Upwind Differencing Scheme 1.

Mixed Differencing Scheme The Mixed Differencing Scheme is more stable than the Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme, so may be the answer if the Quadratic scheme is unstable.

Derivation of Mixed Differencing Scheme

The Mixed Differencing Scheme is a combination of the Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme and the Upwind Differencing Scheme 1.

First-order derivative:

zziiii

∆ΓΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂

121173 211 −−+ +−+

=

Second-order (dispersion) term is approximated with a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Evaluation of Mixed Differencing Scheme

The Mixed Differencing Scheme has the following advantages (+)and disadvantages ():

+ Accurate.

Advantages of Mixed Differencing Scheme: Example

The Mixed Differencing Scheme is a compromise between accuracy and stability. It uses slightly less simulation time than the Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme.

Page 233: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 233

Axial Profile Plot

This graph shows that Upwind Differencing Scheme 1 and Mixed Differencing Scheme are the most stable of all the methods, while Central Differencing Scheme 1 is the least stable.

Note that, in cases with initially clean beds, problems can sometimes be more difficult to initialize with Mixed Differencing Scheme than with Upwind Differencing Scheme 1.

Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme It is known that:

• High-order central difference approximations tend to produce excessive oscillations upwind from a discontinuity.

• Upwind difference schemes tend to produce excessive oscillations downwind of a discontinuity.

Carver and Schiesser (1980) suggest that a correct combination of the two largely cancels out these upwind and downwind oscillations. From this, they developed a five-point biased upwind differencing scheme consisting of one point downwind and three grid points upwind. The approximation is a

Page 234: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 234

combination of central and upwind difference approximations. Results suggest that the biased scheme performs better than classical approximations.

Use Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme (BUDS) when the system is highly nonlinear, and where the presence of sharp fronts requires accurate solution. Because of its fourth-order accuracy, BUDS provides good accuracy for a smaller number of nodes than other lower-order approximations, while the extra CPU time is small.

A potential drawback with BUDS is that, under certain circumstances, it also produces oscillatory behavior. If this happens, then all the other linear differencing schemes are also likely to suffer this problem, with the exception of UDS1.

Derivation of Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme

The fourth-order Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme is based on a fifth-order Taylor expansion.

First order (convection) term:

zziiiiii

∆ΓΓΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ 1123 310186 +−−− ++−+−

=

Second order (dispersion) term is based on a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Evaluation of Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme

The Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme has the following advantages (+) and disadvantages ():

+ Fourth-order accurate, so gives good accuracy for small node counts (so is especially suited to sharp fronts).

+ Simulation time only slightly larger than third-order schemes.

+ Good stability, and less likely to produce oscillations than other higher-order linear discretization techniques.

May produce oscillations under extreme conditions.

Fromms scheme Fromms scheme is the sum of a first order and a second order scheme. It may produce instabilities for large ratios of time to spatial discretization step.

Derivation of Fromms' Scheme

First order (convection) term:

( ) ( )zz

iiiiiii

∆ΓΓΓΓΓΓΓ 2111 25.0 −−+− −−−+−

=∂

Page 235: Aspen Adsim

5 Numerical Methods 235

Second order (dispersion) term is based on a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Flux Limited Discretization Scheme Flux limited schemes combine the accuracy of higher order finite differencing schemes with the stability of the first order upwind differencing scheme (UDS1).

Derivation of the Flux Limited Discretization Scheme

The flux limited differencing scheme is:

( ) ( )z

rz

rzz

iii

iii

iii

∆ΓΓ

Ψ∆

ΓΓΨ

∆ΓΓΓ 21

111

21

21 −−

−−− −

−−

+−

=∂

Here Ψ is the flux-limiter function and r the gradient ratio, calculated as:

1

1

+

−−

=ii

iiir ΓΓ

ΓΓ

There are three versions of the flux-limiter function Ψ to choose from:

• van Leer

• OSPRE

• SMART

Second order (dispersion) term is based on a second-order accurate central differencing scheme:

211

2

2 2zz

iiii

∆ΓΓΓ

∂Γ∂ −+ +−

=

Page 236: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 236

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim

The chapter contains the following information about the Estimation Module:

• Two Estimation Tools in Aspen Adsim 2004.1

• About the Estimation Module

• Defining Estimated Variables in the Estimation Module

• Steady State Estimation Using the Estimation Module

• Dynamic Estimation Using the Estimation Module

• Performing Estimation Using the Estimation Module

• Converting Estimation Module Data

• Recommendations when Using the Estimation Module

Two Estimation Tools in Aspen Adsim 2004.1 Aspen Adsim 2004.1 has two estimation tools; one internal, and one external:

• Estimation Module, which is the existing, internal estimation tool that has been available since Aspen Adsim 10.0

This chapter describes how to use the Estimation Module.

• Estimation features built into Aspen Custom Modeler, which are now accessible from Aspen Adsim 2004.1: − Simulation engine data tables. − Automation (via any COM-compliant application).

This new development links Aspen Adsim more tightly to the overall system. For more information, consult the Aspen Custom Modeler help files. To do this, first open the Aspen Adsim 2004.1 help file, navigate to the topic 'Two Estimation Tools in Aspen Adsim 2004.1', then use the available links.

About the Estimation Module The Estimation Module has been in existence since Aspen Adsim 10.0, It provides an alternate estimation method to automation. The interface simplifies the entry of:

• Estimated variables.

Page 237: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 237

• Measured data.

• Estimation solver options.

The Estimation Module provides two main types of estimation:

• Steady-state (fitting constant parameters to static data).

• Dynamic (fitting constant parameters to time-dependent data).

To access the Estimation Module:

• On the Tools menu, click Estimation Module.

This places an Estimation Module block on the flowsheet, provided one is not already there. The block opens to display the Estimation Module form. An indication is given if either previously defined data or results are available.

The Estimation Module form contains:

• Buttons for commonly performed tasks (these are on the right-hand side).

• Tabs for different data types.

This table lists the buttons on the Estimation Module form:

Button name Description

Store Store entered information in flowsheet block.

Clear Clear all current data in the Estimation Module.

Load Replace current data with data stored in flowsheet block.

Page 238: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 238

Open Open version 10.0 estimation files.

Run Execute estimation run.

Help Open help page.

Copy Table Copy currently visible table onto the clipboard.

This table lists the tabs on the Estimation Module form:

Tab name Description

Estimated Variables Currently selected Fixed variables to be estimated and their results (if available).

Experimental Data Measured experimental data.

Estimation Solver Options Solver options associated with estimation.

Defining Estimated Variables in the Estimation Module Use the Estimated Variables tab to define the variables that need to be fitted against experimental data. A list shows those variables that have a Fixed specification (assumed constant during the simulation), to a maximum of three levels of submodel hierarchy. The list shows only the valid variables that were available on opening.

Page 239: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 239

To select a variable for estimation, select the adjacent box. All selected variables are added to the table. In the table, you can:

• Modify the initial value (guess).

• Change the units of measurement of the initial value.

• View the result after a successful estimation run, along with other statistical information.

Steady-State Estimation Using the Estimation Module Aspen Adsim typically uses steady-state estimation to fit isotherm parameters to static experimental data. For this purpose, the static_isotherm model is provided, which gives access to both the standard inbuilt isotherms and user defined isotherms.

The standard flowsheet for static isotherm fitting contains only a static_isotherm block.

You can add any number of experiments. Each experiment:

• Can be included in the estimation run.

• Has an individual experimental weighting (the default value being 1).

Dynamic experimental data cannot used or entered.

Manually Entering Steady-State Experimental Data To add steady-state experimental data:

1 In the Experimental Data tab, click the Add button. The New Experiment dialog box appears, where you select Steady-State experiment type.

The dialog box looks different if experiments already exist in the Estimation Module. These must be of one type: steady-state or dynamic. So as an example, if you are adding to a set of steady-state experiments, then the dialog box only has the steady-state option.

2 Click OK to return to the Experimental Data tab.

Page 240: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 240

This now has a list of the data sets, as well as extra tabs for adding experimental conditions and measurements. You can weight each experiment individually, the default being 1.

3 Define the experimental conditions using the variables added to the Fixed Variables list, for example the temperature, pressure and mixture composition.

Only variables that are Fixed, and which are chosen for estimation, can be selected. The value of the Fixed variables can be modified.

4 Add measured data to the Measured Variables list. The following tips are useful:

− You can add any Free, Initial or RateInitial variable to the list. − The units of measurement are those currently active. − Each experimental point can have an individual weighting applied, the

default weighting being 1. − When additional experiments are added, the same variables can be

copied from the currently active experiment.

Steady-State Experimental Data from the Clipboard To import steady-state experimental data, for example from Microsoft® Excel:

1 Create a new steady-state experiment, as described in Manually Entering Steady-State Experimental Data on page 6-239. The experimental name is used as the prefix for any copied experiment.

Page 241: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 241

2 When creation is complete, you are prompted with a dialog box asking if you want to copy data from Microsoft® Excel. Click the Yes button.

3 The Obtain Steady State Experiments From Clipboard dialog box appears, which requires copied data to function. Leave this dialog box untouched for now.

4 Open Microsoft® Excel and copy the data set to the clipboard.

The Estimation Module assumes that copied data takes this format:

− Each row is a single experiment. − Columns represent experimental variables (normally, you list the

manipulated variables first, followed by the measured variables).

Page 242: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 242

5 Return to the Obtain Steady State Experiments From Clipboard dialog box, and click the Paste button. A populated table now appears in the dialog box.

6 For each column of data, mark whether it is a varied (manipulated) or measured variable. To do this, select the column and click either the Varied or Measured buttons.

A list appears, from which you select the appropriate variable for the column.

7 Transfer the pasted data to the Estimation Module, either by clicking the Close button or the Process button.

− The experiments created on processing the data are added to any other existing experiments in the Estimation Module.

− If any bounds are exceeded, a further dialog box opens in which you can automatically readjust the bounds for all variables of a similar type in the simulation.

Dynamic Estimation Using the Estimation Module Use dynamic estimation whenever the experimental data is time-dependent, for example the measured outlet composition over time. Aspen Adsim does not assume a specific flowsheet layout, or the use of specialized models. You can use a standard process flowsheet that includes any operational task.

Page 243: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 243

Manually Entering Dynamic Experimental Data To add dynamic experimental data:

1 In the Experimental Data tab, click the Add button. The New Experiment dialog box appears, where you select the Dynamic experiment type.

The New Experiment dialog box looks different if experiments already exist in the Estimation Module. These must be of one type: steady-state or dynamic. So as an example, if you are adding to a set of dynamic experiments, then the dialog box has only the dynamic option.

2 Click OK to return to the Experimental Data tab.

Page 244: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 244

The Experimental Data tab now has a list of the data sets, as well as extra tabs for adding experimental conditions and measurements. You can weight each experiment individually, the default weighting being 1.

3 Define the experimental conditions using the variables added to the Fixed Variables and Initial Variables list, for example the temperature, pressure and mixture composition.

Only variables that are Fixed, and which are chosen for estimation, can be selected. The value of the Fixed and Initial variables can be modified.

4 Add measured data to the Measured Variables list.

− You can add any Free, Initial or RateInitial variable to the list. − A new tab is created for each measured variable, through which you

define the time dependency. − When new variables are added to an experiment, it is possible to copy

the same time points from the currently selected variable. − The units of measurement for any variable are those currently active. − Each experimental point can have an individual weighting applied (the

default value is 1).

Dynamic Experimental Data from the Clipboard To import dynamic experimental data, for example from Microsoft® Excel:

1 Create a new dynamic experiment. When this is completed, the Paste Data button is enabled:

2 The Obtain Dynamic Measurements for Experiment DynExpt From Clipboard dialog box appears, which needs copied data to function. Leave this dialog box untouched for now.

Page 245: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 245

3 Open Microsoft® Excel and copy the data set to the clipboard.

The Estimation Module assumes that copied data takes this format:

− Each row represents a time point. − Columns represent experimental variables.

4 Return to the Obtain Dynamic Measurements for Experiment DynExpt from Clipboard dialog box and click the Paste button. A populated table now appears in the dialog box.

Page 246: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 246

5 For each column of data, mark whether it is the time of measurement, or the measured variable. To do this, select the column and click either the Time or Measured buttons. For measured variables, a list appears, from which you select the appropriate variable for the column.

6 Transfer the pasted data to the Estimation Module, either by closing the dialog box, or by clicking the Process button.

− The experiments created on processing the data are added to any other existing experiments in the Estimation Module.

− If any bounds are exceeded, a further dialog box opens in which you can automatically readjust the bounds for all variables of a similar type in the simulation.

Page 247: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 247

Performing Estimation Using the Estimation Module To perform an estimation using the Estimation Module, click the Run button and leave the module open during the run. You cannot interact with the module during a run.

After a successful estimation run, the module retrieves the results and stores them in the Estimation Module block on the flowsheet. The following results are available:

• Final estimated value

• Standard deviations

• Correlation matrix

• Covariance matrix

Converting Estimation Module Data To convert from using the (old) Estimation Module to the (new) estimation tools available in Aspen Custom Modeler, use the script Convert_EstMod located in the Aspen Adsim library Script folder.

To use the script:

1 Open the input file you want to convert.

2 Double-click the script in the library.

After the script has converted the data, the Estimation Module block disappears from the flowsheet.

To view the experimental data, from the Tools menu click Estimation, which accesses the new estimation system.

3 Save the input file.

Recommendations When Using the Estimation Module The following tips will help you get the best out of the Estimation Module:

• To check that the initial values used for the variables to be estimated give a converged solution, complete these two steps: − Execute a steady-state run for steady-state estimation. − Execute an initialization run for steady-state estimation.

These two steps are important as they ensure that the first iteration of the estimation solver will succeed.

• Use estimation solver tolerances that are greater than the general solver options.

• If simulation convergence gives rise to multiple solutions, try a different initial guess.

• Try to measure variables that are sensitive to the estimated variables. Singular convergence normally indicates an insensitive measured variable.

Page 248: Aspen Adsim

6 Estimation with Aspen Adsim 248

• Check the bounds of the estimated variables. For example, ensure the lower bound of a strictly positive isotherm parameter is zero.

• The fit is only as accurate as the range of data presented by the experiments, so include more than one set of experimental data. For example, with a single data set, the estimated value is useful only for the operating range of the data.

Page 249: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 249

7 Cyclic Operation

Many adsorption processes operate in a cyclic manner. Each cycle is described by a series of single or multiple sequential steps or discrete events. When simulating a cyclic process, you must be able to specify when certain events are going to occur.

Aspen Adsim contains a Cycle Organizer for you to define cyclic operations.

This chapter contains information on the following topics:

• Cyclic Operations in Aspen Adsim 2004.1

• About the Cycle Organizer

• Opening the Cycle Organizer

• Cycle Organizer Window

• Step Control

• Step Variables

• Interaction Control

• Additional Cycle Controls

• Additional Step Controls

• Generating Cyclic Tasks

• Activating and Deactivating Tasks

• Cyclic Reports

Cyclic Operations in Aspen Adsim 2004.1 In Aspen Adsim 2004.1, the Configure form has been extensively modified to allow for many new features. Input files created in previous releases are still compatible. When you open the Cycle Organizer, the old cycle definitions are automatically converted to match the new system, and the old cyclic task is automatically deleted. You then need to regenerate the cyclic task.

About the Cycle Organizer The Cycle Organizer lets you rapidly create the steps that define a cyclic process. Use it to:

• Create any number of steps.

• Define the step termination event.

• Manipulate flowsheet variables for a given step.

Page 250: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 250

• Generate a cyclic task based on the Task Language.

• Distribute cycle information to other flowsheet blocks through global variables.

• Store multiple cycle definitions.

• Control variable recording and automated snapshots.

• Execute V(isual)B(asic) scripts for additional calculations and control.

Here is some more information about the Cycle Organizer:

• The main Configure form gives the status of the system and the active state of the cyclic task.

• All entered data is stored in the block on the flowsheet. This allows the data to be saved with the flowsheet input file.

• Only one Cycle Organizer block is allowed on the flowsheet.

• When you configure the flowsheet for cyclic operation, it is advisable to configure it as if it is about to execute the first step of the cycle.

• On adding a new step, you are asked two questions: − Is the new step to be placed before or after the currently selected

step? − Is the information to be copied from the currently selected step into

the newly created one (to act as a template).

Opening the Cycle Organizer To access the Cycle Organizer:

• From the Tools menu, click Cycle Organizer.

If a Cycle Organizer block does not exist on the flowsheet, one is automatically placed on the flowsheet and the Cycle Organizer window appears. The block looks like this:

To open Cycle Organizer block present on the flowsheet, use either the Tools menu or double-click the flowsheet block.

Cycle Organizer Window The Cycle Organizer window looks like this:

Page 251: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 251

The Cycle Organizer toolbar gives access to the various fields and controls needed to define and generate a cyclic task.

The table lists the main buttons on the toolbar, their purpose, and the options available on their drop-down menus. (The Print and Online button are not described.)

Toolbar button Purpose Options

Cycle Cycle controls, such as creating and activating cycles.

Cycle Options

New Cycle

Generate Task

Activate Cycle

Delete Cycle

Step Step controls, such as modifying and inserting steps.

Control

Manipulated

Interactions

Other

Add/Insert Step

Delete Step

Variable (available only if you selected Manipulated from the Step menu)

Adding or Deleting variables.

Add Variable/s

Delete Variable/s

Page 252: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 252

Step Control There are three ways to define the termination of a given step:

• Explicit time, where termination is linked to elapsed time.

• Discrete event, where termination is linked to an event, such as when a vessel has reached a given pressure.

• Dependent on another step.

If the step is the second half of an interaction, the step is controlled by the elapsed time for the interactions first half. This ensures step symmetry within the cycle.

To access the step control panel:

• In the Cycle Organizer window, click the Step toolbar button; or from the neighboring drop-down menu, click Control.

Time Driven Step Time Driven Step is the most common step control method. Here, the step control is a fixed elapsed time; for example, the step is set to terminate after 60 seconds. The step time remains constant from cycle to cycle.

To select a time-driven step control:

• Enable the Time Driven radio button and give the step time in the specified units:

When the cyclic task is generated, the value is automatically converted to the base time units assumed by the models. Likewise, should the time unit of measurement change, any variable that is ramped in the current step, and any dependent or interacting step, automatically have their times and time units modified.

Discrete Event Driven Step Event-driven step controls are implicit events, for which the time of occurrence is unknown. For example, "the step will terminate when a vessel has reached a given pressure". To define the event, enable one of these three radio buttons:

Page 253: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 253

• Value a comparison between a Free variable and a value defines the event.

• Variable a comparison between a Free variable and another variable defines the event.

• Expression a complex expression defines the event.

Discrete Event Driven Step: Variable/ValueComparison

With Value as your choice of step control, a comparison between a Free variable and a value defines the event.

To define the event:

1 Enable the Value radio button.

2 Specify the monitored variable, either by selecting it from a list of variables, or by typing the exact name.

3 Select a comparison operator from:

== Equal to

<> Not equal to

<= Less than or equal to

>= Greater than or equal to

4 Give the value for comparison, in the unit of measurement of the monitored variable. The unit of measurement can be modified.

Page 254: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 254

Discrete Event Driven Step: Variable/Variable Comparison

With Variable as your choice of step control, a comparison between two variables defines the event.

The procedure for this is similar to the Value option, described in the previous subsection, except that you must specify two variables:

• Monitored variable.

• Variable to make the comparison with.

Discrete Event Driven Step: Complex Expression

With Expression selected, a complex expression that is built up from logical operators defines the event.

This is useful when the step termination depends on a true or false condition.

To define the expression:

1 Enable the Expression radio button.

Page 255: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 255

2 Double-click in the Expression text box. The Expression Builder dialog box appears, where you create expressions:

3 Insert typical operations for the comparisons, using the buttons provided. A searchable list is provided to ensure that you insert only valid variables into the expression.

Note: No error checking is provided for the expression entered, so take care to enter values that are within the valid bounds and in the compared variable's base unit of measurement.

Discrete Event Driven Step: Step Dependent

The final method of step control is to make the step dependent on a previous step.

To use this option:

1 Enable the Step dependent radio button.

2 In the neighboring drop-down menu, specify the dependent step. Only steps that occur before the current step can be selected. Likewise, this option is not available for the first step in any given cycle.

If the step for which a dependency is being defined, is the start of a chain of step interactions, all interacting steps assume the elapsed time and time unit

Page 256: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 256

of measurement of the dependent step. Likewise, all ramp times will be checked and converted to the new time unit of measurement.

Step Variables Within each step of a cycle, different variables may be modified. These variables may control, for example:

• Feed condition

• Valve opening

• Heater duty

The variable change may be stepped or a gradual/ramped change.

To access the list of manipulated variables:

• From the Step button's drop-down list, click Manipulated.

Adding Step Variables To add a new manipulated step variable:

1 Click the Variable button on the toolbar; or from its drop-down list, click Add Variable/s. The Variable Selector dialog box appears, which lists the available fixed and initial variables that have not already been selected in the current step.

2 Select a variable using one of these actions:

− Double-click on the variable in the list. − Type the name of the variable in the text box at the top of the dialog

box (a dynamic search takes place during typing). − Select multiple variables, using either the SHIFT or CTRL key. − Use wildcards in the text box to reduce the list size and then select.

Valid wildcards are: * for any character combination. ? for a single character place holder.

Note the following points:

• There is no limit to the number of variables that can be manipulated in a given step.

• You can access all variables in the flowsheet, except global variables.

Page 257: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 257

• Selected variables are listed alphabetically in the table.

Removing Step Variables You remove step variables directly from the Cycle Organizer window.

To remove a single manipulated variable:

1 Select the row of the required variable.

2 From the Variable button's drop-down menu, click Delete Variable/s.

To remove a series of variables in contiguous rows, select the rows to be deleted.

Changing Step Variable Values

For each defined manipulated variable, the following fields are given:

Field Description

Value Value of the variable for the current step. A check is made to ensure the value is within the bounds for the variable in the current unit of measurement. If a bound is violated, you can automatically adjust bounds for all variables of the same type.

Units Unit of measurement. To modify this, double-click the field and a drop-down menu appears. On changing the unit of measurement, any values provided for the Value and Target fields are automatically recalculated.

Spec Specification of the variable. This cannot be modified.

Ramped Variable to be ramped. Double-clicking this field displays a drop-down menu, where you choose between no ramping, linear ramping or S-shaped ramping.

Target Target value of the ramp. This is visible only for ramped variables. For ramped variables, the number in the Value column is used as the initial starting point of the ramp.

Time Elapsed time of a ramp. This is visible only for ramped variables.

For time-driven steps, the value entered here cannot be greater than the step time.

Page 258: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 258

With discrete event-driven steps; if the event occurs before the ramp has completed, the step terminates when the ramp has completed.

There is no limit to the number of variables that can be ramped in a given step.

Interaction Control If the flowsheet contains interaction units (see Single Bed Approach in Chapter 7), the Step toolbar's drop-down menu contains an Interactions option:

This option accesses the Interaction Control table, which lists the interaction units and the currently defined step interactions.

Defining a Step Interaction To define a step interaction:

• Double-click on the step containing the source material, and from the drop-down list, select the step in which the material is returned.

Note the following points about step interactions:

• Once you select an interacting step, the target cell updates automatically.

• The last row also shows the root defining step for any interactions. This step defines the elapsed time for all associated interacting steps.

• Interaction numbers are: − Positive for forward interactions, where material is accepted early in

the cycle and returned later in the same cycle. − Negative for reverse interactions.

• A single interaction unit is not restricted to a single set of interacting steps; it can be reused for any number of interacting step sets. However, only a single quantity of material can be accepted or returned for a given step. For this reason, if you want to transfer multiple amounts of material in a step, you must use more than one interaction.

Page 259: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 259

Deleting Interaction Steps To delete an interaction:

• From the drop-down list, click None.

Adding Extra Interaction Steps If you insert additional steps before or between existing interacting steps, the interaction numbers are renumbered automatically. For example, if you insert a step between the interacting steps 1 and 3 for unit D1, the new interacting steps are now 1 and 4.

Interacting Steps and Time Controls Once you have defined an interacting pair of steps, the second half of the pair is forced to be time controlled. This ensures time symmetry and maintenance of the material balance between interacting steps.

The time control is based on:

• Fixed time for a time driven step.

• Elapsed time for an event driven step.

The Cycle Organizer continually checks the root defining steps of all interactions, to ensure time controls are in place.

Explanation of Why Time Controls Are Imposed

A single step cannot receive material from both a time driven step, and one that is event driven; nor from two similarly controlled steps that use different times or events. This is because the duration of an event driven step may change from cycle to cycle, so the elapsed time can vary.

For example, in a five-step process using three interaction units, step 1 is time driven, and step 2 event driven. Interaction unit D1 has interactions 1→3 and 5→4; interaction unit D2 has a single interaction 2→4; interaction unit D3 has a single interaction, 3→5.

The table suggests that step 3 is time driven, and step 4 is time driven based on the elapsed time of the event in step 2. In step 5, however, we have two

Page 260: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 260

interactions: one with step 4 (assumed event driven) and the other with step 3 (assumed time driven). In this instance, the step that occurs first is assumed as the root defining step. Thus steps 2 through 5 are all dependent on the elapsed time of step 1.

Additional Cycle Controls To access additional cycle controls:

• Click the Cycle toolbar button, or from the buttons drop-down menu, click Cycle Options.

The additional controls provided for the overall cycle include:

• Number of cycles to execute.

• Record frequency.

• End of cycle snapshots.

• Cycle steady-state testing.

Maximum Cycles Box Use the Maximum Cycles box to specify the maximum number of cycles to execute in a given run. It is coupled to the Record Initial and Record Frequency options.

Assuming you have set the run options for indefinite running, the simulation automatically pauses once the given number of cycles has been performed. Click the Play button again to execute a further batch of cycles.

Page 261: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 261

Record Initial and Record Frequency Boxes Use the Record Initial box to specify the number of cycles at the start of the simulation for which the record attribute remains on. This applies only to variables that have it set to true and time equals zero.

Use the Record Frequency box to specify the cycle at which the record attributes are switched off and then back on for a single cycle.

• If you set these two options to 1, the variables are recorded for all cycles.

• If you set Record Initial to 5, Record Frequency to 10, and the Maximum Cycles to 25, variables are recorded only for cycles 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 15 and 25. This significantly reduces the size of the plot data file.

When using these options, the maximum number of cycles is always automatically modified to ensure the last cycle executed is recorded.

Take Snapshot Box To automatically take a snapshot at the end of every cycle (or cycles based on the settings for Record Initial and Record Frequency):

• Select the Take Snapshot at End of Cycle box.

Taking a snapshot at the end of each cycle is useful if you want a material balance at points during the run. The simulator uses the snapshots to rewind to a time point in history.

Cyclic Steady State Testing Box Select the Cyclic Steady State Testing box to test when the dynamic cyclic simulation has reached a periodic, cyclic, steady state. You need to set a tolerance for this option to work.

During the simulation, the total loading and total solid temperature at the end of a cycle are compared to the value of the previous cycle.

When their relative difference is below the test tolerance, the simulation pauses.

Page 262: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 262

If the Record Initial and Record Frequency are not equal to 1, the simulation automatically pauses after the next recorded cycle.

Additional Step Controls To access the additional step controls:

• Click the Step toolbar button, or from the buttons drop-down menu, click Other.

The additional controls provided for the overall cycle include:

• Execution of a named script.

• End of step snapshots.

Execute End of Step Script Box Select this box to run a flowsheet level script at the end of a step, for every cycle. This is useful for executing external calculations or runtime logging.

Specify the script in the Script Name box. If the script does not exist during cyclic task generation, a template script with the name provided is automatically created.

Take Snapshot at End of Step Box To automatically take a snapshot at the end of step for every cycle (or cycles based on your settings for Record Initial and Record Frequency settings):

• Select the Take a Snapshot at End of Step box.

Taking a snapshot at the end of each cycle is useful if you want a material balance at points during the run. The simulator uses the snapshots to rewind back to a time point in history.

Page 263: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 263

Generating Cyclic Tasks Once a new cycle has been defined, or changes made to an existing definition, the cyclic task needs generating before the simulation can be run. This is indicated in the Cycle Organizer status bar, as follows:

To generate the cyclic task:

• From the Cycle button's drop-down menu, click Generate Task.

View the Cycle Organizer status bar to see how the generation is progressing:

• You see when the cyclic task has been successfully generated (should there be any errors, these will be given in the simulation messages window).

• You see when there is another inactive cycle.

Note the following points:

• If any variable in a step is ramped, additional tasks are generated. The "callable" task contains a single ramp statement. The names of these additional tasks are prefixed by the main task name, followed by an index indicating the step and the manipulated variable.

• Generated cyclic tasks are created using the Task Language. You can open and edit tasks using this language, but any changes you make are lost if you regenerate the task using the Cycle Organizer.

• Only a single cycle definition can be active. If there is more than one cycle description stored within the Cycle Organizer, whenever it is opened it will always display the currently active cycle (or the first cycle definition should no cycle be active).

Activating and Deactivating Cyclic Tasks Use the Cycle Organizer to activate and deactivate cyclic tasks.

If cyclic tasks have been generated for all cycle definitions stored within the Cycle Organizer, you must not activate and deactivate the task by double-clicking the task in the Flowsheet section of Simulation Explorer.

To activate a cycle:

• With the cycle currently inactive , from the Cycle drop-down menu, click Activate Cycle.

To deactivate a cycle:

Page 264: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 264

• With the cycle currently active , from the Cycle drop-down menu click Deactivate Cycle. This also deactivates any other currently active cycle definition.

Cyclic Reports Cyclic reports are now available that provide information on the quantity and quality of material passing along a stream during any step, and any cycle.

In overview, you are picking out information about particular steps and cycles, from the larger Block and Stream reports. Cyclic reports therefore require:

• A Cycle Organizer on the flowsheet.

• Block and Stream reporting enabled.

There are two types of Cyclic report:

• Cyclic Stream reports

• Cyclic Recovery reports

Preparing Aspen Adsim for Cyclic Reporting Before you start your simulation, you need to enable Block and Stream reporting, and specify when to stop recording information for the Cyclic report.

To prepare for cyclic reporting:

1 From the Tools menu, point to Report and then click Reporting. The Flowsheet Reporting dialog box appears:

2 Select the Enable blocks/streams reports box, and underneath, state the number of recorded cycle histories.

3 Click OK.

When you now run the simulation, step-by-step and cycle-by-cycle information is recorded, until the number of cycle histories is reached (this is 11 cycles in our example).

Page 265: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 265

Cyclic Stream Reports

The Cyclic Stream report gives the following information, based on either a total cycle or on an individual step, for each direction of every Aspen Adsim stream on the flowsheet:

• Total material passed.

• Cycle or step averaged flowrate.

• Total of component passed.

• Cycle or step averaged component composition.

• Total energy passed.

• Cycle or step averaged enthalpy.

It also gives the start time, end time and the elapsed time of the selected cycle or step.

Creating Cyclic Stream Reports

You create Cyclic Stream reports for either a cycle or a step.

To create a Cyclic Stream report:

Page 266: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 266

1 From the Aspen Adsim Tools menu, point to Report and click Stream Report. The Cyclic Report dialog box opens.

You now build the report to view it.

2 Enable either the Cycle radio button or Step radio button.

3 In the Cycle number list, select a cycle number. For a step report, you also need to select a step.

4 Click the Build button, or from its drop-down menu click Stream Report. This builds and then displays the Cyclic Stream report.

Cyclic Stream reports can be:

• Copied to the clipboard, where additional information is added, such as the date and time, and input file name.

• Printed to the default printer, which prints only the currently visible columns of the report. The report can be resized.

Cyclic Recovery Reports

The Cyclic Recovery Report gives the following recovery information for every product stream with respect to every feed stream:

• Total material

• Individual component

• Total energy

Page 267: Aspen Adsim

7 Cyclic Operation 267

Creating Cyclic Recovery Reports

You create Cyclic Recovery reports for either a cycle or a step.

To create a Cyclic Recovery report:

1 From the Aspen Adsim Tools menu, point to Report and click Stream Report. The Cyclic Report dialog box opens.

You now build the report to view it.

2 Enable either the Cycle radio button or Step radio button.

3 In the Cycle number list, select a cycle number. For a step report, you also need to select a step.

4 From the Build button's drop-down menu, click Recovery Report. This builds and then displays the Cyclic Recovery report.

Page 268: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 268

8 Flowsheeting

This chapter contains information on:

• About model types

• General model types

• Reversibility

• About flowsheets in Aspen Adsim

• Types of Flowsheet in Aspen Adsim

• Single bed approach

• Pressure interaction diagram

• Interactions

• Specifications for flowsheets

• Physical properties

• Connecting to Aspen Dynamics flowsheets

About Model Types For reversible flow within an Aspen Adsim flowsheet, you need to make some modeling assumptions that define the type of flowsheet interactivity. These assumptions are broadly similar between gas, ion-exchange and liquid systems.

The models in the Aspen Adsim library support these flow regimes:

Page 269: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 269

General Model Types The general model types available in Aspen Adsim are:

Model type Used in Description Typical

models

Non-Reversible Gas

Ion-Exchange

Liquid

Assumes that there is no flow reversal in the model. Material flow is from Process_In to Process_Out.

All models (except for adsorbent/resin beds) can be configured in this way.

Reversible Flow Setter

Gas Relates pressure drop across the model to the flowrate through the model.

Able to specify the flowrate directly.

The model does not contain any material holdup, but may contain a momentum balance.

Typical models: gas_bed, gas_valve, gas_ramp.

Reversible Pressure Setter

Gas Accumulates material and energy (adsorbent beds are an exception).

The pressure at each port is equated directly to the internal pressure.

Able to specify the pressure directly.

.

gas_tank_void, gas_buffer_interaction, gas_feed, gas_product.

Non-Reversible Delay Gas Used as part of an interaction train.

Stores stream information or passes downstream/upstream pressure information.

gas_valve, gas_ramp, gas_interaction.

Reversible Ion-Exchange

Liquid

Feed or product train to allow for reversible flow.

Feeds, products, valves, tanks, distributors.

Reversibility You get reversibility within the flowsheet by categorizing the models into certain types.

Consider the gas phase system as a typical example:

The usual modeling approach is to equate the outlet condition to either the internal condition (a tank for example) or inlet condition (a valve for example).

Page 270: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 270

Y1T1P1H1

Y2T2P2H2

F = ƒ(Ps1,out,Ps2,in)Ys1,out = Ys2,inTs1,out = Ts2,inHs1,out = Hs2,in

Ys1,in = Y1Ts1,in = T1Ps1,in = P1Hs1,in = H1

Tank1

Valve

Tank2Ys1,in = Ys1,outTs1,in = Ts1,outPs1,in = Ps1,outHs1,in = Hs1,out

Ys2,in = Ys2,outTs2,in = Ts2,outPs2,in = Ps2,outHs2,in = Hs2,out

S1 S2

This approach works if the pressure in tank 1 is greater than, or equal to the pressure in tank 2. To allow for a reversed pressure profile, the stream condition must not be directly related to the tank condition, otherwise the model becomes singular. This is where the model type is introduced.

To allow for reverse flow between tanks 1 and 2, the stream condition needs to be determined not by the tanks, but by the unit in-between, the valve unit. The valve uses the following information to ensure the appropriate flow condition is selected:

• Internal composition of the tanks, from the tank units.

• Pressure difference across the valve itself.

We now introduce the concept of flow setter models and pressure setter models:

• As the valve model sets the stream conditions and determines the flow, the underlying model is described as a flow setter.

• The tanks accumulate only material and energy, and relate their pressure to this accumulation, so the underlying model is described as a pressure setter.

To finally accomplish this task, the streams must carry information, such as the internal condition of the pressure setters (the tanks), as well as the actual stream condition.

Page 271: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 271

Y1T1P1H1

Y2T2P2H2

F = ƒ(Ps1,out,Ps2,in)Ys1,out = Ys2,inTs1,out = Ts2,inHs1,out = Hs2,in

If Ps1,out >= Ps2,in Then Ys1,out = Ys1,out,r Else Ys2,in = Ys2,in,rIf Ps1,out >= Ps2,in Then Ts1,out = Ts1,out,r Else Ts2,in = Ts2,in,rIf Ps1,out >= Ps2,in Then Hs1,out = Hs1,out,r Else Hs2,in = Hs2,in,r

Ys1,in,r = Y1Ts1,in,r = T1Ps1,in = P1Hs1,in,r = H1

Tank1

Valve

Tank2

Ys1,in = Ys1,outYs1,in,r = Ys1,out,r

Ts1,in = Ts1,outTs1,in,r = Ts1,out,r

Ps1,in = Ps1,outHs1,in = Hs1,out

Hs1,in,r = Hs1,out,r

S1 S2

Ys2,in = Ys2,outYs2,in,r = Ys2,out,rTs2,in = Ts2,outTs2,in,r = Ts2,out,rPs2,in = Ps2,outHs2,in = Hs2,outHs2,in,r = Hs2,out,r

Ys2,out,r = Y2Ts2,out,r = T2Ps2,out = P2

Hs2,out,r = H2

By using an alternating sequence of pressure and flow setters, you can model process trains where reversibility may occur, without causing singularities.

For adsorbent and resin beds, it is important that the discretization scheme used to solve the partial differential equations can cope with flow reversal at either the inlet and outlet boundaries, or internally.

Page 272: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 272

1 2 n-1 n

1 2 n-1 n

1 2 n-1 n

Forward Direction

Reverse Direction

DiscretizationNodes

OutletBoundaries

InletBoundaries

Process Out

Process Out

Process In

Process In

1 2 n-1 nOutletBoundaries

1 2 n-1 nInletBoundaries

The scheme used within the adsorbent and resin models assumes a constant discretization mesh, with the boundaries evaluated at each local node with respect to the flow and/or pressure gradient. This approach allows for the chosen discretization method to automatically switch between forward and backward differencing.

About Flowsheets in Aspen Adsim You create Aspen Adsim flowsheets either interactively through the graphical user interface, or from a prepared template. The available models are classified into three main phases or types:

• Gas

• Ion-exchange

• Liquid

You can mix these phase types on a flowsheet, subject to these restrictions:

• Use a common global component list.

Page 273: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 273

• Interconnect model blocks using only the appropriate stream type for the phase or model type. The only exception is a gas phase model block, which can contain a liquid outlet to remove any condensed material.

The flowsheeting environment is very flexible, allowing you to create any process flowsheet subject to these restrictions:

• Overall model size versus simulation speed.

• Available models/process operation descriptions.

• Hardware limitations.

The flowsheet scope should ideally cover only the adsorbent columns and any immediate equipment required to operate the process.

When creating new problems, it is good practice to start with a simple flowsheet to ensure the column model assumptions are correct. Once validated, you can then add further complexity, such as column deadspaces, interaction units, other columns and cyclic behavior.

Connectivity on Flowsheets You must use the correct material connection (stream) when connecting model blocks on the flowsheet:

Model prefix Stream type

gas_ gas_Material_connection

ionx_ ionx_Material_Connection

liq_ liq_Material_Connection

Create the connections by dragging and dropping from the library to the flowsheet. Connectivity is enforced by the port types used by each library model and material connection:

Model prefix Port type

gas_ g_Material_Port

ionx_ i_Material_Port

liq_ liq_Material_Port

So, a model with the prefix 'gas_' accepts only connections made with a gas_Material_Connection.

The ports and material connections pass the following information between model blocks (depending on phase or type):

• Molar/Volumetric flowrate

• Molefraction composition/Component concentration

• Molar density

• Absolute temperature

• Pressure

• Specific enthalpy

Page 274: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 274

Controllers are not connected using material connections; they use a special stream type called ControlSignal instead. ControlSignal connects a single exposed variable from one model block to another single exposed variable in the same or another model block.

Templates Predefined process templates are available through the Template Organizer.

To access this:

• From the File menu, click Templates. The Template Organizer appears:

The available templates feature:

• Recommended solver options.

• Runtime options set to the appropriate time units.

• Default component list configured for use with Fortran-based physical properties and populated with dummy components.

• Flowsheet layouts based on standard descriptions.

Before copying a template to the current working directory, a name is requested, which is then used for both the input file and the directory that houses all the files for the new problem.

Demonstrations All of the examples in the Aspen Adsim casebook come as part of the standard installation. These casebook examples are a further source of process templates.

Page 275: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 275

To access the example files:

• From the File menu, click Demonstration Organizer. The Demonstration Organizer appears:

To open a casebook example:

• Select the problem of interest and click Open.

You are told if a set of files will be copied, or if a copy of the example already exists.

Types of Flowsheet in Aspen Adsim There are three types of flowsheet in Aspen Adsim:

• Simple flowsheet

• Intermediate flowsheet

• Full flowsheet

Types of Flowsheet: Simple Flowsheet The simple flowsheet is the smallest workable flowsheet to operate an adsorbent/resin bed. It is a recommended starting point for new simulations. Use it to:

• Ensure the absorbent/resin bed works effectively.

• Simplify testing of key parameters and configuration assumptions.

The simple flowsheet typically includes the following unit operations for all phases or types:

Page 276: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 276

• Feed boundary unit.

• Adsorbent/resin bed (can contain any number of layers).

• Product boundary unit.

Adsorbent orResin Bed

Product Boundary

Feed Boundary

Intermediate Flowsheet The intermediate flowsheet is useful for simulating non-interacting adsorption cycles. It builds upon the simple flowsheet by including (except for ion-exchange):

• Adsorbent bed deadspaces or voids.

• Feed and product valves.

Page 277: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 277

AdsorbentBed

Product Boundary

Feed Boundary

TopDeadspace

(Tank)

BottomDeadspace

(Tank)

Product Valve

Feed Valve

Use the intermediate flowsheet to simulate:

• Co-current or counter-current adsorption.

• Repressurization and depressurization.

• Purge using streams of different compositions.

Full Flowsheet The full flowsheet is the final step in flowsheet complexity. It builds on either the simple or intermediate flowsheet by including:

• Interactions with other adsorbent/resin beds.

• Additional feed or product trains.

• Intermediate buffer tanks or pressure receivers.

• Feed and product pumps.

To simulate interacting beds, there are two levels of overall model complexity:

Page 278: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 278

• Single bed approach this uses a single bed to simulate processes containing more than one bed.

• Rigorous multi-bed this simulates all adsorbent/resin beds with interconnecting units.

Single Bed Approach An inherent problem when modeling an adsorption system is the number of equations to be solved, the majority of which are discretizations of the partial differential equations.

One way of modeling adsorption systems that comprise multiple adsorbent/resin beds, is to use the single bed approach. For the method to be valid:

• Each adsorbent/resin bed (or series bed train) must be identical.

• Each adsorbent/resin bed must undergo the same steps in a given cycle.

If these assumptions are met, then you can rigorously model a single real adsorbent/resin bed and store any information (material) that would normally be sent to an interacting bed. This stored information can then be replayed back to the real bed later in the cycle.

The single bed approach retains the accuracy of the final results (see the spreadsheet included within the installation):

• Same average purity.

• Same number of cycles to achieve cyclic steady-state.

Simulation speed is also improved:

• Fewer equations (due to fewer beds).

• Less data to be communicated between the client (GUI) and the server (simulation engine).

Pressure Interaction Diagram Before creating a flowsheet, it is important to sketch out the pressure interaction diagram for your process. This diagram is a graph of pressure versus time, with material interactions overlaid.

In the following example, a simple three step Oxygen VSA process is examined. The process uses three identical adsorbent beds, each undergoing the following steps in a cycle:

• Production at high pressure with some product that counter-currently repressurizes another bed.

• Evacuate to low pressure. The material is sent to waste.

• Repressurize using product material.

The Pressure-Interaction diagram for the process looks similar to this:

Page 279: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 279

P

t

Bed 1

Bed 2

Bed 3

60 180120

If the single bed approach is applied, using Bed 1 as the real bed, the interactions would look like this:

Page 280: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 280

P

t

Bed 1

Bed 2

Bed 3

60 180120

Record Replay

Flowsheet Scope

Material profile information from step 1 can be stored and then replayed back to Bed 1 during step 3. The final pressure-interaction diagram for the new single bed process looks like this:

Page 281: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 281

P

t

Bed 1

60 180120

Interactions When material from a step is used by another step, this is called an interaction. Aspen Adsim handles any number of interactions in an adsorption process cycle.

Using the Oxygen VSA example, the pressure-interaction diagram was as follows:

P

t

Bed 1

60 180120

The three, 60 second duration steps were:

• Step 1 0 through 60 seconds there was production with some material used to repressurize another bed.

• Step 2 60 through 120 seconds there was counter-current evacuation to waste.

• Step 3 120 through 180 seconds there was counter-current repressurization with product material.

In this example there is only one interaction, a top-to-top interaction between steps 1 and 3. To create this interaction when using the single bed approach, you must use an interaction model to simulate the bed that the real modeled bed is interacting with. In gas systems, for example, it is named gas_interaction. The interaction model records one or more of the following profiles (dependent on the phase of the system):

• Flowrate

• Composition or concentration

• Density

Page 282: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 282

• Temperature

• Pressure

• Specific enthalpy

To use the gas_interaction model, for example:

• The inlet stream must always be connected to a valve (configured as a non-reversible delay) whose inlet is connected to point on the flowsheet where material is withdrawn. The valve passes the interaction unit information about the upstream (or relative bed) pressure. Typically, the valve inlet is connected to a gas_tank_void model that is being used to simulate an adsorbent bed deadspace or void.

• The outlet stream defines where material is returned to the flowsheet. No valve is required on the outlet stream.

Real BedScope

Store Profile

Real BedScope

Replay Profile

Valve PresentIn Scope

Valve Not PresentIn Scope

Store Replay

Use the withdrawal and return point for material, to define whether the interaction is:

• Top-to-top

• Top-to-bottom

• Bottom-to-bottom

• Bottom-to-top

So, for the Oxygen VSA example, the following additions are needed to create a top-to-top interaction off the real adsorbent beds top void.

Page 283: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 283

Tank

Valve

Interaction

From bed

To product

Notes:

o The interaction units use the Delay function.

o The accuracy of the delay function is dependent on the communication interval, not the integration step size. It is recommended that you have at least four communication points within the shortest step.

o If the simulation is closed or a snapshot re-used, the delay buffer is emptied and all historical profile information is lost.

o The snapshot does not store delay information.

Specifications for Flowsheets This section gives information on:

• Solver Options

• Run Time Options

• Model Specification

• Consistency and Model Definition Checks

Solver Options If you create a flowsheet that is not based on a template, the following solver options are recommended as good initial starting points:

General Tab: Solver Options

The recommended solver options are:

Page 284: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 284

Option Value

Absolute Variable Tolerance 1e-5

Relative Variable Tolerance 1e-5

Absolute Equation Tolerance 1e-7

Variable Change Tolerance 1e-5

Numerical Derivative Absolute Tolerance 1e-6

Numerical Derivative Relative Tolerance 1e-6

Solver Scaling Disabled

Eliminate Equivalence Equations Enabled, Standard

Integrator Tab: Solver Options

The recommended solver options are:

Option Value

Integrator Variable Step Implicit Euler

Initial Integration Step 1

Minimum Integration Step 1

Maximum Integration Step 5

Step Reduction Factor 0.5

Maximum Step Increment Factor 1.5

Absolute Integration Error Tolerance 1e-5

Tear Integration Tolerance 1

Maximum Corrector Iterations 500

Show Highest Integration Errors 0

Use Interpolation Enabled

Reconverge Torn Variables Disbaled

Note: When running rapid cycles, the integration steps may need reducing.

Linear Solver Tab: Solver Options

The recommended solver options are:

Option Value

Name MA48

Drop Tolerance 0

Pivot Tolerance 0

Re-analyse Threshold 2

Page 285: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 285

Re-analyze FLOPS Window Size 0

Re-pivot every 0

Solver searches 3

Non-Linear Solver Tab: Solver Options

The recommended solver options are:

Options Value

Mode General

Method Fast Newton

Convergence Criterion Residual

Maximum Divergent Steps 20

Maximum Step Reductions 20

Maximum Iterations 500

Maximum Fast Newton Steps 8

Dogleg Method Disabled

Run Time Options To set the runtime options for Aspen Adsim:

• From the Run menu, click Run Options.

The following settings are recommended:

Options Value Comments

Solution Time Units Seconds Time unit assumed by library models.

Display Update 2 Interval when data is communicated between client and server.

Communication Problem dependent

Resolution at which plot data and delay information is saved. Small values make the plot data file grow more rapidly.

When using interactions, ensure this value is set to provide at least five communication points in the shortest interaction step.

When studying rapid transients, set this to a small value.

Pause at Problem dependent

Uncheck when using the Cycle Organizer (run time controlled by maximum number of cycles). Check and provide a desired end time for other simulations. This value can also be modified using the Run menu Pause At option.

Pause after Unchecked Number of communication intervals to execute.

Real time synchronization

Unchecked Real time to simulation time factor. A value of zero indicates run as fast as possible.

Page 286: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 286

Model Specification Aspen Adsim library models may require one or more of the following types of specification:

• Definition of model assumptions.

• Specification of constant variables.

• Initial and preset conditions.

The normal approach is to first configure the model, then specify the constant variables exposed and finally, if required, specify the model initial condition.

Defining Model Configurations

The model configuration is the selectable assumptions a model may have. For example, with an adsorbent layer, you have the option to:

• Include a dispersive term in the component material balance.

• Specify whether the layer is isothermal or non-isothermal.

You set these options in the model Configure form, which opens when you double-click a flowsheet model block. This form displays selection boxes for any available adjustable assumptions. On changing an assumption, the model automatically reconfigures, so there may be slight pause depending on the overall complexity of the change.

Specification of Constant Variables

All models in the Aspen Adsim library contain recommended fixed variables. This ensures that the overall degrees of freedom of a complete problem are always met. Therefore, there is no need to determine which values are required to be specified. Each model in the Aspen Adsim model library contains a Specify table. You access the Specify table in one of these three ways:

• Using the Configure form for the model.

• From the Flowsheet menu, clicking Forms options.

• Using the models context sensitive menu (selecting and right-clicking a flowsheet model block).

The recommended columns made visible in the Specify table are:

• Value

• Units

• Derivative

• Specification

• Description

Presets and Initialization

If a model contains state variables (variables that are differentiated with respect to time), initial values are required. Adsorbent layer and tank models typically fall into this category.

To define the preset and initial variables, click the button on the Configure form to open the Initials table, which shows the recommended variables to preset and initial.

Page 287: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 287

For an adsorbent/resin bed:

• Provide values for a single discretization node within a given layer. To propagate this value through the rest of the layer, either click the Initialize button on the models configure form, or select Check & Initial from the Flowsheet menu.

• To specify a layer that is at saturated equilibrium with a given bulk phase composition, initialize the bulk phase values (molefraction or concentration) and for the loading, set the derivatives to zero with a specification of Rateinitial.

• For a gas adsorbent layer that includes a pressure drop correlation (momentum balance), the standard specification is to initialize the superficial velocity and initial ncomps-1 bulk phase molefractions.

For a gas phase tank or void:

• Preset (provide free specified values for) the internal composition.

• Preset (provide a free specified value for) the internal pressure.

• Provide an initial value of the temperature.

• From the above and using the internal volume, the initialize method calculates the material molar holdup.

• A valid alternative specification is to initialize the temperature, pressure and ncomps-1 internal molefractions, and to free the internal molar holdup.

If you modify initial or preset values solely in the Initials table (and not elsewhere), the Check & Initial option in the Flowsheet menu always ensures that the problem contains the correct number of initial variables.

The recommended columns to made visible in the Initials table are:

• Value

• Units

• Derivative

• Specification

• Description

Consistency and Problem Definition Checks When creating and specifying a flowsheet, it is recommended that you make these checks:

• For cyclic processes, configure the flowsheet with first step conditions.

• Check the initial and preset pressure conditions throughout the flowsheet. Ensure the pressure gradient is correct for the direction of material travel, for example feed to product.

• Allow cross-valve pressure drops of at least 1 mbar.

• For gas adsorbent beds, for robust initialization assume a small initial superficial velocity, for example 3.55e-4 m/s.

• Pay particular attention to the deadspaces connected to a gas adsorbent. Ensure the pressure profile between the two units are reasonable and in the correct direction, and that the deadspaces have been correctly

Page 288: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 288

initialized. Unreasonable initial conditions for deadspace are the principal cause of full flowsheet convergence problems at the start of the simulation.

• Make use of the Flowsheet menu Check & Initial option. It indicates unconnected and invalid streams, corrects interaction unit configurations, runs any model-based initialization methods, and correctly configures material stream source and destination unit types.

• If the model has too many initial variables, use Variable Finder to find all Initial and Rateinitial variables. Set the specification of any found variables to Free and then use the Check & Initial option from the Flowsheet menu. The default initial condition is reconstructed.

• Make use of the recommended Fixed variables. If any are set to a specification of Free, another variable needs to be Fixed and vice-versa. For example, using a simple gas flowsheet, the default specification is for it to be pressure driven. If forced feed is required, set the feed unit flowrate specification to Fixed and the product unit specification to Free.

• The library models contain default specifications. Should the problem become over or underspecified, use either the specification analysis tool; or using Variable Finder, find all variables and from the properties page, set the specification to default values.

• For flowsheets with interaction units, ensure the run time communication interval allows at least five communication points within the shortest interacting steps.

• For processes that operate under rapid cyclic conditions, ensure the integrator step sizes are suitable. For example, when using the Variable Step Implicit Euler integrator, try setting the maximum integrator step to half the shortest step time, and the initial and minimum steps sizes to 1/5 through 1/10 of the maximum integrator step.

• The default solution bounds for variables defined in the library are suitable for most problems. However, when operating with large pressure or temperature swings, or very rapid cycles, the default bounds may need readjusting. Use the Variable Finder for this.

• If you receive messages stating that empty arrays are being passed to procedures, this usually indicates that the current component list is not defined. When flowsheeting, it is usual to first create the component list and then start placing models on the flowsheet.

• If a spanner/wrench appears in the specification window when flowsheeting, ensure that a component list is defined and that all connections are in place.

Physical Properties Various physical properties are required by the Aspen Adsim models. Typical properties required are:

• Molecular weight

• Viscosity

• Density

• Enthalpy

Aspen Adsim supports two ways of supplying this physical property data:

Page 289: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 289

• User Fortran subroutines.

• External physical property application (Properties Plus, Aspen Properties).

The component list created for the problem governs the method in which physical properties are called.

• If you use a template, the default component list assumes that user Fortran subroutines are being used.

• When starting a new problem (without a template), the default component list is configured for use with an external properties application. To modify it for use with user-Fortran, you must first convert it to a component set (to do this, right-click the list and select convert).

• If a new component list is created, by default it is assumed an external properties application will be used. If you want the user Fortran option, select the Is ComponentSet box is on creation.

Use of User Fortran Historically, Aspen Adsim assumed that any physical property calculations or data were supplied through user Fortran subroutines.

The advantages of using user Fortran based calculations are:

• Simulation speed.

• When distributing a problem, only need to additionally supply the library.

Disadvantages of using the user Fortran method are:

• Inflexibility when changing component names. Arrays indexed by component name are passed to procedures in ASCII order, hence subroutines may need modifying in response to changing component order.

• Addition and removal of components from the simulation. The user subroutines either need reworking after each change or a collection of different versions of subroutines (each assuming different numbers of components) will be required.

When creating a component list:

The interface between the subroutine and model is defined by the Procedure type. The procedure definition defines the calling arguments, subroutine name and library name. The subroutines created then need to be compiled into a library so that they link to the simulation during runtime.

It is important that the compiled library is placed in the simulator engines working directory. The working directory has the same name as the current simulation, and is one level down from the default working directory. For example, if the name of the current problem is N2PSA.ada and the default working folder has been defined as C:\MySims, the simulation engines working folder for this problem is C:\MySims\N2PSA.

This applies to both local PC and remote server implementations.

Page 290: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 290

Using a Physical Properties Application The simplest way of incorporating physical property calculations and data, is to use an external physical properties application such as Properties Plus or Aspen Properties.

The advantages of using an external physical properties application are:

• Ability to create a single definition file containing all the components and physical property methods of interest, and only those required in the current problem.

• Large collection of rigorous physical property methods.

• Extensive component database.

The disadvantages are:

• Speed penalties.

• Requires application on same machine.

When using Properties Plus or Aspen Properties, for example, the steps required before using either application are:

1 Create an .appdf file.

2 In Aspen Adsim, within the Explorer window, right-click Component Lists and select Properties. Define where the .appdf is located.

3 Create or convert a component list and select the components required.

Switching Between Methods To switch between using user Fortran and an external properties application for the supply of physical property calculations and data:

1 If converting from user Fortran to an external application, ensure the link to an .appdf file is already defined. (To do this, right-click the ComponentLists object in Explorer and browse for a previously created .appdf file.)

2 Select the currently active component list.

3 Right-click the list and select Convert.

The component list switches to the other method its currently using.

When switching from Fortran to application based properties, if the component names originally defined are present in the .appdf file, the same components will be present, otherwise mismatches will be discarded.

4 Open the Configure form for any library model of the flowsheet. The global variable that switches the two methods is automatically updated.

Page 291: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 291

Connecting to Aspen Dynamics Flowsheets You can now connect Aspen Adsim flowsheet sections to Aspen Dynamics flowsheet sections (except for ion-exchange flowsheets). There are two new utilities models for this purpose:

• Dynamics_Inlet_Connect

• Dynamics_Outlet_Connect

These models are in the Utilities folder of the Aspen Adsim library.

The model link must be done from within Aspen Adsim; the link cannot be set up from Aspen Dynamics.

Tip: If you are creating an Aspen Adsim flowsheet for connection with an Aspen Dynamics flowsheet, it is good practice to name the active component list as 'Type 1'. This simplifies later conversion.

Typical Workflows When you want to connect Aspen Dynamics models to Aspen Adsim models, there are two possible situations:

• Attach individual Aspen Dynamics models to an existing Aspen Adsim simulation.

• Attach a complete Aspen Dynamics simulation to an existing Aspen Adsim simulation.

Attaching Individual Aspen Dynamics Models

To attach an individual Aspen Dynamics model (for example, a rigorous compressor model) to an existing Aspen Adsim simulation:

1 In Aspen Adsim, open the Aspen Adsim simulation.

2 Open the Aspen Dynamics library. To do this: From the File menu, click Open Library and navigate to the Lib folder of the AMSystem 2004.1 installation.

3 Place the required Aspen Dynamics model onto the Aspen Adsim flowsheet.

4 Attach the new Aspen Dynamics flowsheet block to an existing Aspen Adsim flowsheet block, as follows:

Attach an Aspen Adsim material stream to the Aspen Adsim flowsheet block, and an Aspen Dynamics material stream to the newly placed Aspen Dynamics flowsheet block. Now connect these two streamsusing either a Dynamics_Inlet_Connect or Dynamics_Outlet_Connect model from the Utility folder of the Aspen Adsim library. Your choice depends on whether the Aspen Dynamics model is on the inlet or outlet side of the Aspen Adsim mode.

5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the flowsheet is complete.

Page 292: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 292

6 Check and modify the global variables relating to Aspen Dynamics flow schemes. You do this in the Global variables table, or from the Configure form of a Dynamics_Inlet_Connect or Dynamics_Outlet_Connect block:

Global variable

Brief description

Notes

GlobalPDriven Is the flowsheet pressure driven?

For gas systems, set to True.

GlobalPropMode Property mode Default is Local. If property convergence is difficult, set to Rigorous. (Aspen Adsim uses only rigorous property calls.)

GlobalRFlow Reverse flow? Set to True if the model is expected to operate reversibly.

7 Specify, and provide initial values for, the new Aspen Dynamics blocks.

Attaching Complete Aspen Dynamics Flowsheet

To attach a complete Aspen Dynamics simulation to an existing Aspen Adsim simulation (for example, an Aspen Dynamics based cryogenic distillation train to an Aspen Adsim TSA system for air dehumidification):

1 In Aspen Adsim, open the Aspen Adsim simulation.

2 Check the component lists being used:

− Ensure matching component list names between the Aspen Adsim and Aspen Dynamics simulations. Typically, the Aspen Dynamics version is called Type1. If necessary, you must rename the Aspen Adsim component list name to match. If the Aspen Adsim component list name is Default, you cannot rename it through the GUI. Instead, open the input file (.ada extension) within a text editor and search and replace the original component name, to the new component name.

− Ensure the same components are actively in use. − Ensure the same properties definition file, .appdf, is in use.

3 The type of Aspen Dynamics flowsheet that can be imported depends on the type of Aspen Adsim flowsheet:

− For gas-based Adsim flowsheets, imported Aspen Dynamics flowsheets must be pressure driven. See Valid Flowsheet Combinations, later.

− For liquid-based Aspen Adsim flowsheets, imported Aspen Dynamics flowsheets may be either pressure driven or flow driven. See Valid Flowsheet Combinations, later.

− You must check the Globals table in Aspen Adsim and set the global parameters GlobalPDriven and GlobalRFlow to match those in the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet to be imported.

4 From the File menu, click Import Flowsheet. This imports the Aspen Dynamics simulation into Aspen Adsim. Note these points:

− Aspen Adsim does not support flowsheet hierarchy, so all Aspen Adsim based blocks and streams must exist on the main flowsheet.

Page 293: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 293

− Repeated blocks, streams, plots, tables and tasks names are flagged during the flowsheet import. You can rename or delete these repetitions, or import the flowsheet into a hierarchy block.

− Aspen Adsim automatically opens the Aspen Dynamics model library during the import.

− The Aspen Adsim simulation flowsheet is updated with the imported Aspen Dynamics simulation flowsheet.

− For common global variables, Aspen Adsim retains the original settings from before the flowsheet was imported.

5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 until all the required flowsheet sections are present within Aspen Adsim.

6 Between each flowsheet section, connect the appropriate Aspen Adsim or Aspen Dynamics feed and product streams:

− For an existing Aspen Adsim feed or product stream, remove the boundary termination block (unlike Aspen Dynamics, Aspen Adsim has no concept of using open ended streams to indicate flowsheet boundaries). Now connect these open-ended Aspen Adsim streams with their Aspen Dynamics counterparts, using either a Dynamics_Inlet_Connect or a Dynamics_Outlet_Connect from the Utilities folder of the Aspen Adsim library. (Your choice depends on whether the Aspen Dynamics model is on the inlet or outlet side of the Aspen Adsim flowsheet.)

7 Repeat step 6 until the flowsheet is complete.

8 In the Cycle Organizer, modify the cycle description to account for any cyclic operation of imported Aspen Dynamics blocks, then regenerate the cyclic task.

Valid Flowsheet Combinations The valid combinations of Aspen Adsim and Aspen Dynamics flowsheets are:

• Connect gas-based Aspen Adsim flowsheets to pressure driven Aspen Dynamics flowsheet sections.

• Connect liquid-based Aspen Adsim flowsheets to flow driven Aspen Dynamics flowsheet sections.

Further valid combinations are also possible, and these are listed in the following table. Some combinations have constraints: in the table, bracketed numbers mark where this happens and you should refer to the notes underneath for more details.

Inlet side section (Aspen Dynamics)

Outlet side section (Aspen Dynamics)

Gas (Aspen Adsim)

Liquid (Aspen Adsim)

Pressure driven Pressure driven Supported (1) Not Supported

Pressure driven Not present Supported (2) Supported (3)

Not present Pressure driven Supported (4) Supported (5)

Flow driven Flow driven Partial support (6) Supported

Flow driven Not present Partial support (7) Supported

Page 294: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 294

Not present Flow driven Partial support (8) Supported

Reversible

(pressure driven)

Reversible

(pressure driven)

Supported (9) Not supported

Reversible

(pressure driven)

Not present Supported (10) Supported

Not present Reversible

(pressure driven)

Supported (11) Supported

You cannot mix flow assumptions, for example a pressure driven inlet and a flow driven outlet. This is because a single set of global variables is used to control the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet assumption.

The following notes relate to the bracketed numbers (denoting constraints) in the previous table:

1 Connect the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet sections on both the inlet and outlet sides to a pressure node (a gas_tank_void for example).

2 Connect the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet section on the inlet side to a pressure node (a gas_tank_void for example).

3 Fix a pressure at the Aspen Adsim flowsheet outlet.

4 Connect the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet sections on the outlet side to a pressure node (a gas_tank_void, for example).

5 Fix a pressure at the Aspen Adsim flowsheet inlet.

6 Connect both Aspen Dynamics flowsheet sections only to a gas_bed model.

7 Connect the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet only to an Aspen Adsim gas_bed inlet.

8 Connect the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet only to an Aspen Adsim gas_bed outlet.

9 Connect the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet sections on both the inlet and outlet sides to a pressure node (a gas_tank_void for example). The single bed approach is not recommended; use a full rigorous Aspen Adsim flowsheet instead.

10 Connect the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet section on the inlet side to a pressure node (a gas_tank_void for example). The single bed approach is not recommended; use a full rigorous Aspen Adsim flowsheet instead.

11 Connect the Aspen Dynamics flowsheet section on the outlet side to a pressure node (a gas_tank_void, for example). The single bed approach is not recommended; use a full rigorous Aspen Adsim flowsheet instead.

Global Variables

A number of global variables control the operation of both Aspen Adsim and Aspen Dynamics models. These variables can be found in the Globals table within the Simulation object in the Simulation Explorer. You can also access many of these global variables through the Configure form of the Dynamics_Inlet_Connect and Dynamics_Outlet_Connect model blocks.

Page 295: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 295

The global variables used are as follows: Global variable Default

value Description

GlobalPropMode Local The global property mode.

Aspen Dynamics models use GlobalPropMode to select between local or rigorous physical properties calculations:

The Local option uses simplified functions whose parameters are updated from an external physical property package. This improves the simulation time.

The rigorous option uses methods contained within the external physical properties package.

Note: All Aspen Adsim models use rigorous property calls.

GlobalPdriven False Is the simulation pressure driven?

Aspen Dynamics models use GlobalPdriven to switch the overall flowsheet scheme between pressure-driven flow and flow-driven flow. In general, for Aspen Dynamics models used in conjunction with Aspen Adsim models:

When the system is gas, set to True.

When the system is liquid, set to False.

Note: If you anticipate flow reversibility within Aspen Dynamics models, the flowsheet must be pressure driven (so set the parameter to True).

GlobalRFlow False Does the simulation support reverse flow?

Aspen Dynamics uses GlabalRFlow to switch between uni-directional and bi-directional flow. For bi-directional flow, you must also set GlobalPdriven to True, otherwise the Aspen Dynamics models will default to uni-directional, flow-driven flow.

GlobalTimeScaler 1 Seconds per model time unit.

Aspen Dynamics models assume time units of hours, whereas Aspen Adsim models assume seconds. When models from both products exist on the same flowsheet, a common time unit needs to be adopted to successfully calculate time derivatives and delay times. Aspen Dynamics uses GlobalTimeScaler to rescale time derivatives and calculated delay times, from hours to seconds.

IsSingleBed False Is the single bed approach being used?

IsSingleBed indicates to Aspen Adsims Dynamics_Inlet_Connect and Dynamics_Outlet_Connect models, whether the Aspen Adsim flowsheet is using the Single-Bed approach to simulate a multi-bed flowsheet using a single column.

When set to True, a set of equations is enabled that generate pseudo continuous flow from an inherently discontinuous flow.

Page 296: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 296

Connecting to a Single Bed Approach Flowsheet The single bed approach to modeling a cyclic adsorption process is an abstract representation of the real process, so it suffers from the inherent behavior of discontinuous flow at the flowsheet boundaries. For example, a product stream from an Aspen Adsim flowsheet may be active (producing material) only during one step in the cycle.

time

Flowrate

Cycle

This behavior can disrupt Aspen Dynamics flowsheets that are connected to this same outlet boundary, as they may be expecting to continuously receive material. For example, a discontinuous supply of material may cause adverse effects to downstream units such as distillation columns or compressors.

To counter this problem, the Dynamics_Inlet_Connect and Dynamics_Outlet_Connect models have been developed, which contain a series of expressions to generate a pseudo continuous flow of material. They use a similar set of expressions to the gas_interaction model. The flow, composition, temperature, pressure and enthalpy profiles are recorded during the flow of actual material, whilst a delay function is used to reproduce the same profile, periodically throughout the rest of the cycle.

time

Flowrate

Cycle

Delayed Profiles

DT

2 x DT

3 x DT

4 x DT

The two models use a variable that switches/toggles to indicate when flow of real material occurs. When set to 1 (that is On, for real flow), the inlet and outlet port variables are mapped together and the time at which the switch

Page 297: Aspen Adsim

8 Flowsheeting 297

was set to 1 is recorded. When no real flow is occurring, the variable switches to 0 (that is Off, for pseudo flow); and the time at which the switch occurred is recorded, and a delay time is calculated. The Aspen Dynamics port variables are then mapped to the appropriate Aspen Adsim port variables, but through the delay function. When the elapsed time from the switch off exceeds the calculated delay time, the delay time is incremented by the original delay time.

DelayTime

Time Seconds0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

B1.

Togg

le

B1.

Del

ayTi

me

12

34

56

78

910

-50

510

1520

2530

The result of this procedure is a continuously variable delay time that produces a profile with a repeating pattern.

Output_Values

Time Seconds0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

B1.

Cal

cOut

put

B1.

Rea

lOut

put

0.5

11.

52

-1-0

.50

0.5

1

This method is applicable only if the assumption that the flow profile expected at the inlet and/or outlet side of the Aspen Adsim flowsheet is consistent within a given cycle.

The delay function is used to replicate flow profiles. This, coupled with the fact that it uses interpolation of historical data, explains why you may see a slight degradation in the overall material balance.

Page 298: Aspen Adsim

9 Reference List for Adsorption Processes 298

9 Reference List for Adsorption Processes

Bird, R.B., Stewart, W.E., Lightfoot, E.N., Transport Phenomena, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1960.

Carberry, J.J., Chemical and Catalytic Reaction Engineering, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1976.

Carver, M.B., Scheisser, W.E., American Institute of Chemical Engineers, Annual Meeting, November 16-18, 1980.

Costa, E., Sotelo, J.L., Calleja, G., Marron, C., Adsorption of Binary and Ternary Hydrocarbon Gas Mixtures on Activated Carbon: Experimental Determination and Theoretical Prediction of the Ternary Equilibrium Data, AIChE Journal, Vol. 27, No. 1, 1981.

Froment, G.F. and Bischoff, K.B., Chemical Reactor Analysis and Design, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1990.

Kast, W., Adsorption aus der Gasphase, VCH, Weinheim, 1988.

Nakao, S.I., Suzuki, M.U., Mass Transfer Coefficient in Cyclic Adsorption and Desorption, Journal of Chem. Eng. of Japan, Vol 16, No 2, 1983.

Reid, C.R., Prausnitz, J.M., Sherwood, T.K., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1977.

Ruthven, D.M., Principles of Adsorption and Adsorptive Processes, John Wiley and Sons, 1984.

Slater, M.J., The Principles of Ion Exchange Technology, Butterworth, Heinemann, Boston, 1991.

Tien, Chi, Adsorption Calculations and Modeling, Butterworth-Heinemann, 1994.

Wakoo, N., Chem Eng Sci, 31, pp 11-15, 1976.

Yang, R.T., Gas Separation by Adsorption Processes, Butterworth, 1987.

Page 299: Aspen Adsim

Index 299

Index

A

Activating cyclic tasks 257

Adsorbed solution theory (gas) 64

Adsorption isotherms (gas)

about 51

choosing 52

list 55

multicomponent mixture isotherms 52

Aspen Custom Modeler 230

Aspen Properties 284

available 299

Axial dispersion (gas) 22

Axial dispersion (ionx) 182

Axial dispersion (use for differencing schemes) 223

B

B.E.T isotherm (gas) 58

B.E.T. Multilayer isotherm (gas) 58

Bed model assumptions (gas) 11, 13

Bed model assumptions (ionx) 179

Bed model assumptions (liq) 192

Bed model ports (gas) 14

Bed models (gas) 14

Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme 227

Brunaur, Emmet and Teller See B.E.T

Burke-Plummer equation (gas) 26

C

Central differencing schemes 222, 223

Complex expression step control 248

Compressiblity (gas) 21

Conduction (gas) 65

Conduction (liq) 207, 210

Configure form (gas)

about 15

bed types 16

internal heat exchanger 19

spatial dimensions of beds 18

Configure form (ionx) 179

Configure form (liq) 192

Configure form tabs (gas)

Energy Balance 64

General 20

Isotherm 51

Kinetic Model 31

Material/Momentum Balance 22

Procedures 76

Reaction 73

Configure form tabs (ionx)

General 180

Isotherm 185

Kinetic Model 183

Material/Momentum Balance 180

Configure form tabs (liq)

Energy Balance 206

General 193

Isotherm 200

Kinetic Model 196

Material/Momentum Balance 193

Procedures 213

Page 300: Aspen Adsim

Index 300

Configure Layer form (gas) 20

Configure Layer form (ionx) 179

Configure Layer form (liq) 192

Connecting controllers 268

Connectivity in flowsheets 267

Consistency checks for flowsheets 281

Constant variables (specifying) 280

Controllers 268

ControlSignal stream 268

Convection (gas) 23

Convection (ionx) 180

Convection (liq) 193

Convert_EstMod script 241

Cycle controls 254

Cycle Organizer

about 243

cycle controls 254

Cycle Organizer window 244

cyclic reports 258

cyclic tasks 257

interaction control 252

opening 244

step controls 246, 256

step variables 250

Cycle Organizer block 244

Cycle Organizer window 244

cycle controls 254

cyclic reports 258

cyclic tasks 257

interaction controls 252

step controls 256

step variables 250

Cycle snapshots 255

Cyclic corrections (gas) 49

Cyclic operations 243

Cyclic Recovery report 260

Cyclic reports 258

Cyclic Recovery reports 260

Cyclic Stream reports 259

preparing 258

Cyclic Stream report 259

Cyclic tasks 257

D

Darcy's Law (gas) 26

Darcy's law (liq) 195

Deactivating cyclic tasks 257

Demonstration Organizer 269

Demonstrations 268

Density (liq) 196

Discretization methods

about 218

choosing 219

list 219

recommended 219

Discretization methods (gas) 20

Discretization methods (ionx) 180

Discretization methods (liq) 193

Dispersion (gas) 23

Dispersion (ionx) 180, 182

Dispersion (liq) 193

Dispersion coefficient (ionx) 180

Dispersion coefficient (liq) 193

Dispersive properties (gas) 27

documentation 297

Dual Layer B.E.T isotherm (gas) 62

Dual-Site Langmuir isotherm (gas) 61

Dual-Site Langmuir isotherms (liq) 201

Dubinin-Astakov isotherm (gas) 59

Dynamic estimation

about 236

entering data manually 237

importing data from clipboard 238

E

Effective diffusivity (gas) 36, 39, 50

Energy balance assumption (gas) 64

Energy balance assumption (liq) 206

Page 301: Aspen Adsim

Index 301

Energy balance equations (gas)

factors affecting equations 81

gas phase 78, 81

solid phase 78, 84

wall 79, 86

Energy balance equations (liq) 213

Energy Balance tab (gas) 64

Energy Balance tab (liq) 206

Enthalpy (gas) 65

Enthalpy (liq) 208

Equation symbols (gas) 87

Equation symbols (ionx) 189

Ergun equation (gas) 27

Estimated mass transfer coefficient (gas) 50

Estimated Variables tab 232

Estimation

converting Estimation Module data 241

dynamic 236

estimated variables 232

Estimation Module 230

methods available 230

performing using Estimation Module 241

recommendations 241

steady-state 233

Estimation methods 241

Estimation Module

about 230

converting to Aspen Custom Modeler methods 241

defining estimated variables 232

dynamic estimation 236

recommendations 241

steady-state estimation 233

using 241

Estimation Module block 231

Estimation Module form 231

Event-driven step controls 246

Experimental Data tab 233, 237

Expression Builder dialog box 249

Extended Langmuir isotherm (ionx) 187

Extended Langmuir isotherms (gas) 60

Extended Langmuir isotherms (liq) 201

Extended Langmuir-Freundlich isotherm (gas) 61

Extended Langmuir-Freundlich isotherm (ionx) 187

Extended Langmuir-Freundlich isotherms (liq) 203

F

Film model assumption (gas) 31

Film model assumption (ionx) 183

Film model assumption (liq) 197

Flow reversibility 263

Flowsheet specifications See Specifying flowsheets

Flowsheet types 269

full 271

intermediate 270

simple 269

Flowsheets

about 266

Connectivity 267

Cycle Organizer block 244

demonstrations 268

interactions 275

model types 263

physical property calculations 282

Pressure Interaction diagram 272

reversibility of flow 263

single bed approach 272

specifications 277

templates 268

types 269

Fluid phase energy balance (liq) 214

Fluid thermal conductivity (liq) 210

Flux Limited Differencing Scheme 229

Flux Limiter method? (gas) 21

Freundlich isotherms (gas) 56

Page 302: Aspen Adsim

Index 302

Freundlich isotherms (liq) 202

Fromm's Scheme 228

Full flowsheet 271

G

g_Material_Port 267

Gas adsorption processes (overview) 11, 12

Gas model assumption (gas) 21

Gas thermal conductivity (gas) 69

gas_Material_connection 267

Gas-Wall heat transfer coefficient (gas) 72

General tab (gas) 20

General tab (ionx) 180

General tab (liq) 193

Generating cyclic tasks 257

Glueckauf approximation (gas) 49

gUserCompressibility submodel 22

gUserCpa submodel 66

gUserDH submodel 67

gUserDispersion submodel 24

gUserEffDiff submodel 37, 41, 50

gUserGibbs submodel 63

gUserHTC submodel 68

gUserIsothermC submodel 63

gUserIsothermPoi submodel 63

gUserIsothermPp submodel 63

gUserKg submodel 69

gUserKinetic submodel 35

gUserKineticModel submodel 43

gUserMTC submodel 49

H

Heat capacity (gas) 66

Heat capacity (liq) 208

Heat exchanger (gas) 19

Heat of adsorbed phase (gas) 65

Heat of adsorbed phase (liq) 208

Heat of adsorption (gas) 66

Heat of adsorption (liq) 208

Heat transfer coefficient (gas) 67

Heat transfer coefficient (liq) 209

Heat transfer to environment (gas) 70

Heat transfer to environment (liq) 211

Henry isotherms (gas) 57

Henry's coefficient (gas) 47

Heterogeneous rate dependency (gas) 75

Heterogeneous reactions (gas) 74

Homogeneous rate dependency (gas) 74

Homogeneous reactions (gas) 74

Horizontal beds (gas) 16

I

i_Material_Port 267

IAS (gas) 53, 64

IAS (liq)

about 200

IAS Freundlich isotherms 204

IAS Langmuir isotherms 204

IAS Langmuir-Freundlich isotherms 205

Purecomponent procedure with IAS isotherm 206

Purecomponent submodel with IAS isotherm 206

IAS Freundlich isotherms (liq) 204

IAS isotherm (gas) 63

IAS Langmuir isotherms (liq) 204

IAS Langmuir-Freundlich isotherms (liq) 205

Ideal Adsorbed Solution theory See IAS

Ideal gas (gas) 21

Importing data from Microsoft® Excel

dynamic 239

steady-state 235

Initialization for models 280

Interaction control 252

Interactions 252

Interactions between steps 275

Interactions example 275

Intermediate flowsheet 270

Page 303: Aspen Adsim

Index 303

Internal heat exchanger (gas) 19

Ion-exchange adsorption processes (overview) 178

Ion-exchange equilibria 185

Ion-exchange resins 178

ionx_Material_connection 267

Isotherm assumed for layer (gas) 55

Isotherm assumed for layer (ionx) 186

Isotherm assumed for layer (liq) 200

Isotherm dependency (gas) 64

Isotherm list (gas) 55

Isotherm list (ionx) 186

Isotherm list (liq) 200

Isotherm tab (gas) 51

Isotherm tab (ionx) 185

Isotherm tab (liq) 200

Isothermal conditions (gas) 65

Isothermal conditions (liq) 207

Isotherms (gas) 55

Isotherms (ionx) 185

Isotherms (liq) 199

iUserDispersion submodel 182

iUserIsotherm submodel 187

iUserKinetic submodel 184

iUserMTC submodel 185

K

Karman-Kozeny equation (gas) 26

Karman-Kozeny equation (liq) 195

Kinetic model assumption (gas) 31

Kinetic model assumption (ionx) 184

Kinetic model assumption (liq) 197

Kinetic Model tab (gas) 31

Kinetic Model tab (ionx) 183

Kinetic Model tab (liq) 196

Knudson diffusion coefficient (gas) 48

L

Langmuir isotherms (gas) 55

Langmuir isotherms (liq) 200

Langmuir-Freundlich isotherm (gas) 57

Langmuir-Freundlich isotherms (liq) 202

Leonard Differencing Scheme 223

Linear isotherm (gas) 59

liq_Material_connection 267

liq_Material_Port 267

Liquid adsorption processes (overview) 191

Lumped resistance (gas) 32, 44, 46

Lumped resistance (ionx) 184

Lumped resistance (liq) 197

lUserDH submodel 209

lUserDispersion submodel 195

lUserGibbs submodel 206

lUserHTC submodel 210

lUserIsotherm submodel 205, 206

lUserKinetic submodel 198

lUserKl submodel 211

lUserMTC submodel 199

M

Mass action equilibrium isotherm (ionx) 186

Mass balance equations (gas)

additional solid phase 77, 81

factors affecting equations 79

gas phase 77

Mass balance equations (ionx) 188

Mass balance equations (liq) 213

Mass transfer (gas)

about 31

lumped resistance 32, 44

micro and macropore effects 32

molecular diffusivities 45

particle material balance 36, 39

procedures 43

submodels 43

Mass transfer (ionx) 183

Mass transfer (liq) 196

Mass transfer coefficient (gas) 46, 50

Page 304: Aspen Adsim

Index 304

Mass transfer coefficient (ionx) 185

Mass transfer coefficient (liq) 198

Mass transfer driving force (gas) 31

Mass transfer driving force (ionx) 183

Mass transfer driving force (liq) 197

Material balance assumption (gas) 23

Material balance assumption (ionx) 180

Material balance assumption (liq) 193

Material/Momentum Balance tab (gas) 22

Material/Momentum Balance tab (ionx) 180

Material/Momentum Balance tab (liq) 193

Maximum number of cycles 254

Micro and macropore effects (gas) 32, 34, 46

Micro and macropore effects (liq) 198

Microsoft® Excel 235, 239

Mixed Differencing Scheme 226

Model configuration (defining) 280

Model specifications 280

Model types 262

Models

list of types 263

reversibility 263

types 262

Molecular diffusivities (gas) 45

Molecular diffusivity (ionx) 182

Momentum balance assumption (gas)

about 25

constant pressure options 25

pressure driven options 26

Multicomponent mixture isotherms (gas) 52

Myers isotherm (gas) 60

N

New Experiment dialog box

dynamic 237

steady-state 233

Nodes (gas) 21

Non-ideal gas (gas) 21

Non-isothermal conditions (gas) 65

Non-isothermal conditions (liq) 209, 210

Non-Isothermal conditions (liq) 207

Nonlinearity and numerical methods 218

Non-Reversible Delay models 263

Non-Reversible models 263

Number of heterogeneous reactions (gas) 75

Number of homogeneous reactions (gas) 75

Number of nodes (gas) 21

Number of nodes (ionx) 180

Number of nodes (liq) 193

Numerical methods

about 218

Biased Upwind Differencing Scheme 227

Central Differencing Schemes 222, 223

Flux Limited Differencing Scheme 229

Fromm's Scheme 228

Leonard Differencing Scheme 223

Mixed Differencing Scheme 226

Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme 224

recommended 219

selecting 219

Upwind differencing schemes 221

Upwind Differencing Schemes 222

O

Obtain Dynamic Measurements for Experiment DynExpt From Clipboard dialog box 238

Obtain Steady State Experiments From Clipboard dialog box 235

Overall material balance assumption (liq) 196

P

Particle material balance See Particle MB options

Particle MB 2 option (gas) 39, 50

Particle MB option (gas) 36, 50

Particle resistance coefficients (gas) 34

PDE differencing schemes

Biased Upwind 227

Central 222, 223

Page 305: Aspen Adsim

Index 305

Flux Limited 229

Fromm's 228

Leonard 223

Mixed 226

Quadratic Upwind 224

Upwind 221, 222

Peclet number (gas) 23

Peclet number (ionx) 183

Physical property calculations

about 282

external applications 284

switching between methods 284

user Fortran 283

Port types 267

Prandl number (gas) 68

Prandl number (liq) 210

Presets for models 280

Pressure (gas) 25

Pressure (liq) 195

Pressure drop assumption (liq) 195

Pressure drop options (gas) 27

Pressure Interaction diagram 272

Pressure Interaction diagram example 272

Problem definition checks for flowsheets 281

Procedures (used in)

effective diffusivity 50

fluid thermal conductivity 211

gas thermal conductivity 69

heat of adsorbed phase 66

heat of adsorption 67, 209

heat transfer coefficient 68, 210

isotherms 62, 187, 205

kinetic model 43, 184, 198

mass transfer coefficient 49, 185, 199

material balance 24, 181, 194

molecular diffusivities 46

purecomponent isotherms 206

Procedures tab (gas) 76

Procedures tab (liq) 213

Properties Plus 284

pUser_Act_Coeff procedure 64

pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Heat procedure 83

pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_C procedure 75, 83

pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_C_Sol procedure 75, 83

pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_Pp procedure 75, 76, 83

pUser_g_Cat_Rx_Rate_Pp_Sol procedure 75, 76, 81, 83

pUser_g_Compressibility procedure 22

pUser_g_Cpa procedure 66

pUser_g_De procedure 37, 41, 50

pUser_g_DH procedure 67

pUser_g_Diffusivity procedure 46

pUser_g_Dispersion procedure 24

pUser_g_Gas_Rx_Heat procedure 83

pUser_g_Gas_Rx_Rate_C procedure 74, 83

pUser_g_Gas_Rx_Rate_Pp procedure 74, 83

pUser_g_Gibbs procedure 62

pUser_g_HTC procedure 68

pUser_g_Isotherm_C procedure 62

pUser_g_Isotherm_P procedure 62

pUser_g_Isotherm_Poi procedure 62

pUser_g_Kg procedure 69

pUser_g_Kinetic procedure 35, 43

pUser_g_MTC procedure 49

pUser_i_Dispersion procedure 181

pUser_i_Isotherm_C procedure 187

pUser_i_Isotherm_W procedure 187

pUser_i_Kinetic procedure 184

pUser_i_MTC procedure 185

pUser_l_DH procedure 209

pUser_l_Dispersion procedure 194

pUser_l_Gibbs procedure 206

pUser_l_HTC procedure 210

pUser_l_Isotherm_C procedure 205

pUser_l_Isotherm_W procedure 205, 206

pUser_l_Kinetic procedure 198

pUser_l_Kl procedure 211

Page 306: Aspen Adsim

Index 306

pUser_l_MTC procedure 199

Q

Quadratic Upwind Differencing Scheme 224

R

Radial beds (gas) 18

Radial nodes (gas) 21

Rate dependency (gas) 74, 75

Reaction processes (gas) 73

Reaction tab (gas) 73

Reactions present? (gas) 74

Reactions type (gas) 74

Real Adsorbed Solution theory (gas) 64

Real Adsorbed Solution Theory (gas) 54

Recommended numerical methods 219

Recording cycle information 255

Reference list 292

Reversibility example 264

Reversibility of flow 263

Reversible Flow Setter models 263

Reversible models 263

Reversible Pressure Setter models 263

Rigorous multiple bed approach 272

Run time options (specifying) 279

Running end-of-step scripts 256

S

Sherwood number (gas) 47

Simple flowsheet 269

Simulation Messages window 254, 255

Single bed approach 252, 272

Single Layer B.E.T isotherm (gas) 61

Snapshots 255, 256

Solid phase energy balance (liq) 214

Solid reactant list (gas) 76

Solid reactants present? (gas) 76

Solver options (specifying) 277

Spatial dimensions of beds (gas) 18

Specifying flowsheets

checks 281

list of options 277

model specification 280

run time options 279

solver options 277

Static_isotherm model 233

Steady state testing (cyclic) 255

Steady-state estimation

about 233

entering data manually 233

importing data from clipboard 234

Step controls 256

Step dependent step control 249

Step interaction control 252

Step interactions 252, 275

Step variables 250

Stoichiometric Equilibrium isotherms (liq) 203

Submodels (used in)

component isotherms 206

effective diffusivity 50

fluid thermal conductivity 211

gas thermal conductivity 69

heat of adsorbed phase 66

heat of adsorption 67, 209

heat transfer coefficient 68, 210

isotherms 63, 187, 205

kinetic model 43, 184, 198

mass transfer coefficient 49, 185, 199

material balance 24, 182, 195

T

Task Language 257

Template Organizer 268

Templates 268

Time controls (reason for) 253

Time-driven step controls 246

Toth isotherm (gas) 57

Page 307: Aspen Adsim

Index 307

U

Upwind differencing schemes 221, 222

User Multicomponent Procedure isotherm (liq) 205

User Multicomponent Submodel isotherm (liq) 205

User Purecomponent Procedure with IAS isotherm (liq) 206

User Purecomponent Submodel with IAS isotherm (liq) 206

V

Variable fields 251

Variable Selector dialog box 250

Velocity (gas) 25

Velocity assumption (liq) 196

Vertical beds (gas) 16, 18, 27

Volmer isotherm (gas) 59

W

Wall energy balance (liq) 214

Water softening and purification (ionx) 178